CIX Prog Manual Vol 1

TOSHIBA
Digital Solutions Division
TM
Strata CIXTM
Programming Manual
Volume 1
(Release 4.0)
Title Page
November 2005

Strata CIX Release 4.0
3. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C,
RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items
General End User Information
2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
4. Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M,
The Strata CIX100, CIX200 or CIX670 Digital Business Telephone System is
04DU9-BN/DN/1SN, 02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN
registered in accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission's Rules and Regulations.
Radio Frequency Interference
FCC Requirements
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
established rules which permit the Strata CIX system to be connected directly to the
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company--
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
interference.
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
U
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie
ä L
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/pages/support_dealerlocator.html or call (800)
Important Notice -- Music-On-Hold
222-5805 and ask for a Toshiba Telecom Dealer.
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
compatibility or use of the Strata CIX system, the telephone company will notify you in
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CIX system to the
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
1. Your telephone number.
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
2. FCC registration number:
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
the Equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
· Strata CIX100, CIX200 or CIX670 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX
telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
upon your operation of the system.
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
· If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be registered as a Key telephone system.
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
service in some situations.
· If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
telephone system registration in some areas.
the user to disconnect the equipment.
· If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
for assistance.
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
© CIX100 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
CAUTION!
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
Key: CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
CIX200 Registration Numbers
PBX: CJ6PF03BDTCHS192, fully-protected PBXs
Hybrid: CJ6MF03BDTCHS192, fully-protected multifunction systems
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Key: CJ6KD03BDTCHS192, fully-protected telephone key systems
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
CIX670 Registration Numbers
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
PBX: CJ6MUL-35934-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35933-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
Key: CJ6MUL-35932-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
· Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is
useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your
telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is
called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to
one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices
you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact
your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling
area.
Publication Information
© Copyright 2005
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Digital Solutions Division, reserves the
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any reason,
Digital Solutions Division
including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or
to simply change the design of this document.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means--graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Digital Solutions Division, also
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems--without
reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant.
CIX-MA-PRGM1-VC
Refer to Page iv for trademark information.
Version A, November 2005

TAIS DSD License Agreement
TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. ("TAIS")
Digital Solutions Division License Agreement
IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU ("YOU") AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY
SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, "SOFTWARE") INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS DIGITAL SOLUTIONS PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE AVAILABLE TO
YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE SUPPLIER. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR DISTRIBUTION
THROUGH TAIS AUTHORIZED CHANNELS ONLY TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software
provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying,
distributing, printing, sublicensing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the
Software is strictly prohibited except as permitted by applicable law; you agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice,
against you or any other person in possession of the Software. You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the
Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the
software in the event that you or any other person violates this License Agreement. Execution of the Software for any additional capabilities require a valid run-time license.
2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain
the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices
contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the
software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes
a willful infringement of copyright.
3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from
attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein
will result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS.
4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO
YOU.
5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS' ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS' OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR
REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY.
6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION.
7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the
United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or
order, is prohibited.
8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions.
9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. The Software and other materials provided hereunder constitute Commercial Computer Software and
Software Documentation and Technical Data related to Commercial Items. Consistent with F.A.R. 12.211 and 12.212 they are licensed to the U.S. Government under, and the U.S. Government's rights
therein are restricted pursuant to, the vendor's commercial license.
10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way
be affected or impaired.
11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no
waiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party.
12. Supplier Software. The Software may include certain software provided by TAIS suppliers. In such event, you agree that such supplier may be designated by TAIS as a third party beneficiary of TAIS with
rights to enforce the Agreement with respect to supplier's software.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU
FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Digital Solutions Division
5932
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
United States of America
DSD 020905
Strata CIX / CTX Programming 6/05
iii

TAIS DSD Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Digital Solutions Division
Limited Warranty
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., ("TAIS") warrants that this telephone equipment (except for fuses, lamps, and other consumables)
will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer to a retail customer in new condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship
for twenty-four (24) months after delivery. This warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance
conditions, (b) if the equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the equipment is
subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS
dealer, (e) if the equipment's serial number is defaced or missing, or (f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with
products not supplied by TAIS and which are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance.
The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with respect to the equipment, is the
repair or replacement by TAIS or its authorized dealer of such defective or missing parts as are causing the malfunction with new or refurbished
parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its authorized dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer's sole remedy will be a
refund of the price charged by TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through one of its
authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever first occurs.
Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct, special, indirect, consequential, or
exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the
purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is malfunctioning.
To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the attention of one of TAIS' authorized
dealers within the twenty-four (24) month period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring
the malfunction to the attention of an authorized TAIS dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty
service.
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC., OR TOSHIBA
CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE
EXCLUDED.
No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such modification or extension is effective
unless it is in writing and signed by the vice president and general manager, Digital Solutions Division.
Strata CIX, SD (Secure Digital) and SmartMedia are registered trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Stratagy , eManager , My Phone Manager and Info Manager registered trademarks of Toshiba America
Information Systems, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Trend Micro and PC-cillin are registered trademarks of Trend Micro Inc.
Norton Anti-Virus is a registered trademark of Symantec Corp.
McAfee and Virusscan are registered trademarks of McAfee, Inc.
SmartMedia and Secure Digital registered trademarks of Toshiba
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their respective owners.
iv
Strata CIX / CTX Programming 6/05

Introduction
This manual provides information required to program the Strata CIX business telephone systems
using Toshiba's eManagerTM programming interface and the 900 series Button Programming.
Important!
Whenever the CIX100 is mentioned in this book, it applies to both the CIX100-S and
CIX100, unless specified otherwise. Whenever the CIX is mentioned in this book, it
applies to all CIX100, CIX100-S, CIX200 and CIX670 systems, unless specified
otherwise.
Important!
Do not downgrade to previous versions of CIX or CTX software. Downward
compatibility of CIX database is not supported. Toshiba recommends keeping the
current database for emergency situations. We guarantee upward compatibility of
the database, so you can upgrade the system without any problems.
R4.0 Processors
The chart below shows the processor PCB required to support the Release 4.0 software package.
System:
Processor PCB
Required to Support R4.0
CIX100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACTU3A
CIX200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCTU1A
CIX670 Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCTU2A
CIX670 Expanded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BCTU2A with BEXU2A
Note The features described in this document assume that the Strata CIX system has the current
software release installed. At the time of printing, Strata CIX R4.0 and eManager R4.0
(R400A14) are the most current versions.
CIX Release 4.0 only applies to the Strata CIX670, CIX200 and CIX100 systems and
requires eManager R400A14 (or later).
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
ix

Organization
Organization
Chapter 1 - Programming Guidelines describes auto-recognition features, order of
programming, and overview of general CIX Programming operation.
Chapter 2 eManager provides general information about the Strata eManager software
capabilities. Includes the installation steps needed to install Strata eManager on a PC and establish
a connection to the Strata CIX system.
Chapter 3 Licenses Strata CIX license descriptions and procedures
Chapter 4 System provides system programming information
Chapter 5 Station discusses station and station feature programming.
Chapter 6 Trunks explains trunk programming information including T1, ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
Chapter 7 Attendant describes Attendant Console support and settings available in eManager.
Chapter 8 IP Telephony describes the programs required to program IP Telephony features.
Chapter 9 Services discusses programming of services available to Strata CIX through
eManager.
Chapter 10 Operation explains system setup options available to eManager users. System
initialization, SmartMedia formatting, system software upgrades and Internet Protocol (IP)
configuration are among the topics discussed.
Chapter 11 Maintenance provides system and component trace program information.
eManager Configuration and Flash Memory Testing are also described.
Chapter 12 Tools and Profile discusses Strata CIX Tools and Utilities to help manage your
Strata CIX System more efficiently.
Chapter 13 Telephone Button Programming discusses the 900 series button programming
interface provided with Strata CIX.
Chapter 14 Data Backup, Restore and Updateprovides Strata CIX maintenance procedures
that can be activated from the programming telephone.
Appendix A Application Guides uides to setup and program specific aplications such as Voice
Mail, IP Telephony, StrataNet and others
Appendix B Software and Firmware Updates contains IP Telephone and BIPU Firmware
update procedures.
x
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Conventions
Conventions
Conventions
Description
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
Note
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply
to specific items.
Important!
Calls attention to important instructions or information.
Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be
CAUTION!
damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING!
Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death.
Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension
[DN]
or intercom number.
Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
[PDN]
number for the telephone).
Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears
[SDN]
on another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN]
Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
Arial Bold
Represents telephone buttons.
Courier
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
"Type"
Indicates entry of a string of text.
"Press"
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press
Enter.
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example:
Plus (+)
Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential
entry.
Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~)
Means "through." Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.
ä
Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.
ä
Denotes a procedure.
Start > Settings >
Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen you
Printers
should select.
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
See Figure 10
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
xi

Related Documents/Media
Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print.
To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on
the back of the document's title page.
Installation and Programming
· Strata CIX Installation & Maintenance Manual
· Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 1
· Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 2 (Stratagy ES Voice Mail Application)
· Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 3 (Application Implementation)
· Telephone Button Programming Manual
· Strata Record Sheets
User Guides
· Strata CIX IPT/DKT Telephone
· My Phone Manager User Guide
· Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone
· Strata CTX Standard Telephone
· Strata CTX DKT2204-CT/DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephones
Quick Reference Guide
· Strata Wireless IP Telephone
· Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone
CD-ROMs
· Strata CIX Application Software, eManager and CIX Documentation Library
· Strata CIX Call Center Solutions Application Software and CIX Documentation Library
(includes Strata CIX ACD software and documentation, Net Server software and
documentation, and Voice Assistant software and documentation)
· OAISYS (includes software and documentation for OAISYS Chat, Call Router, and
Net Phone)
For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata CIX
documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications.
xii
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
1 Progra Stratmming a CIX
This chapter discusses Strata CIX programming basics and guides you through initial setup procedures. It
also describes auto-recognition features, order of programming, and overview of general CIX eManager,
and Button Programming operations. Programming sequence tables are provided to streamline your
programming tasks.
Step 1: Use Default Auto-programming to
Start Up
Important!
All programs and instructions apply to all Strata CIX systems, unless specified otherwise.
This feature reduces the programming time to install Strata CIX systems. The Strata CIX system will
automatically program specific default data in a number of programs based on the PCBs that are installed
in the system before processor initialization. The default data and procedure for auto-programming is
provided in this section.
1. Install all line, station and optional PCBs that should be recognized for auto programming.
2. Power-on the system and initialize auto-programming for the system (Program 900, Level 1).
3. Verify "Station and BIOU Auto-programming" on page 1-2.
4. Verify "Station PDN Auto-programming" on page 1-3.
5. Verify "CO Line Auto-programming" on page 1-3.
6. Verify "CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming" on page 1-8.
Notes
·
The type of PCB, its cabinet and slot position are automatically recognized upon system initialization;
or, when powering the CIX processor for the first time.
·
Each installed PCB circuit equipment number is set in numerical order based on the cabinet and slot
position of the PCB.
·
Station Primary Directory Numbers (PDN) and CO line numbers are set in numerical order according
to their equipment cabinet/slot positions.
·
Other default data, such as the Strata CIX LAN and modem interface IP address, station and line class
of service, outgoing and incoming line groups, etc., are automatically set for the optional hardware
originally installed.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-1

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Limitations
The following are the limitations of Strata CIX auto-programming.
· CTI programs are not programmed automatically.
· Strata CIX cannot configure unique LAN requirements automatically. Strata CIX's LAN system data,
CIX IP address and Community Name are set to a default.
Note DND is only assigned on 20-button telephones.
· When the system is initialized, it takes a few minutes to recognize the mounted hardware.
· The Primary DN on the first button and DND on the last button are assigned telephone buttons; all other
buttons are not assigned automatically.
· In the Strata CIX100 or CIX670 Slot 101 must always have a BDKU, ADKU or PDKU. The BDKU is
assigned if no PCB is installed.
· In the Strata CIX200 Slot 101 must always have a LIPU, BDKU or PDKU. An LIPU is assigned if no
PCB is installed, however no stations are assigned..
Station and BIOU Auto-programming
Table 1-1 shows the Station and BIOU PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming.
Note No special assignments are set for BIOU during auto-programming.
Important!
PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CIX and MAS Installation and
Maintenance manual, Configuration Chapter, Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
Table 1-1
Auto-Programming for Station and BIOU PCB Recognition (Program 100)
Parameter
PCB Code
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Comments
Setting
000
No PCB or RRCU
None or Remote Cabinets
8 Standard Telephone
Standard telephone no VM interface
002
RSTU
circuits
settings
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without
S-OCA (DKT3000 limitations:
PCM
003
PDKU2 8
Digital
Telephone
DKT2000, 16 character LCD display on
Highway: 8
DKT3000, DKT3000 LCD Feature key
does not function, DKT3014 large
screen LCD does not display).
004
Not used
Not used
017
BDKU
8 digital telephones
8, 1B circuits
DKT2000 or DKT3000 without S-OCA
018
BDKU1+BDKS
16 digital telephones
16, 1B circuits DKT2000 or DKT3000 without S-OCA
Page/MOH/Relay
019
BIOU
No functions assigned
interface#1
No functions assigned. Strata CIX100
Page/MOH/Relay
assigns a virtual BIOU2 into a virtual
020
BIOU2
interface#2
location, Cabinet 02, Slot 05, to provide
control of the ACTU relay.
1-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Station PDN Auto-programming
Progra
When auto programming recognizes installed station PCBs, it assigns PDNs in numerical order as follows:
Str
· Auto programming assigns PDNs to station PCB equipment numbers (cabinet, slot, circuit) in
at
mming
a
equipment number order. All installed station PCB circuits will be assigned a PDN regardless of the
CI
circuit type, digital (BDKU/BDKS, PDKU) or analog (RSTU). LIPUs are not assigned PDNs.
X
· PDN 200 or PDN 2000 (depending on the system size) is assigned to the station circuit having the
lowest equipment number in the system, then the PDN is incremented by one digit and assigned to the
next highest station equipment number and so on. See Table 1-2.
· Program 205 Feature Button Setting A Primary DN (PDN) is assigned to FB01 on each digital
telephone according to its equipment number (cabinet, slot, circuit) position. DND is assigned to FB20
on 20-button telephones and is not assigned on 10- and 14-button telephones.
Table 1-2
Auto-Programming for Station Primary Directory Number
First digit
CIX Basic Processor
CIX670 Expanded Processor
Primary DNs (3-digits)
Primary DNs (4-digit)
2
200~299 depending on quantity of station 2000~2571 depending on the quantity of station
PCBs installed
PCBs installed
Primary DN (3-digits)
3
300~399 depending on the quantity of
station PCBs installed
CO Line Auto-programming
Table 1-3 shows the CO line PCBs that will be recognized and set in Program 100 during auto-
programming. The default data for CO line Incoming Line Groups (ILG), Outgoing Line Groups (OLG),
and CO line service type is set as shown in Table 1-4.
Important!
PCBs must be installed per the rules in the Strata CIX and MAS Installation and
Maintenance manualmanual, Configuration Chapter, Worksheet 6 and Worksheet 7.
Table 1-3
Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100)
PCB
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Parameter setting
Comments
Code
000
-
No PCB or RRCU
None or Remote cabinets
4 analog Loop or
001
RCOU, RGLU
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
ground start lines
8 analog loop start
005
RCOU+RCOS
Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
lines
006
RDDU
4 analog DID lines
Direct Inward Dial lines
16 or 24 digital T1
PCM Highway:
007
RDTU2
T1 Direct Incoming Termination (DIT) lines
lines
16 or 241
Standard telephone and DKT2000 and
DKT3000 without S-OCA (DKT3000
4 Standard telephone
limitations:
008
RDSU
and for digital
DKT2000, 16 character LCD display on
telephone
DKT3000, DKT3000 LCD Feature key does
not function, DKT3014 large screen LCD
does not display).
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-3

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-3
Auto-Programming for CO line PCB Recognition (Program 100) (continued)
PCB
PCB Name
PCB Circuit Type
Parameter setting
Comments
Code
Caller ID interface for RCOU/RCOS and
4 or 8 Caller ID
RGLU analog CLID lines. Note: The same
009
RCIU2+RCIS
interface
Prg100 code (009) is used for RCIU2 with or
without RCIS.
2 or 4 E911 analog
CAMA lines Note: The same Prg100 code
010
RMCU+RCMS
CAMA lines
(009) used for RCIU2 with or without RCIS.
4 analog Tie lines, 4
011
REMU, BVPU
Tie lines
VoIP circuits
2 ISDN BRI (S/T)
TIE Type:
012
RBSU
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
4 ISDN BRI (S/T)
TEI Type:
013
RBSU+RBSS
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
16 or 24 ISDN PRI
PCM Highway:
014
RPTU
ISDN BRI CO lines
channels
16 or 241
2 ISDN BRI (U)
TEI Type:
015
RBUU
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
4 ISDN BRI (U)
TEI Type:
016
RBUU+RBUS
ISDN BRI CO lines
circuits
Two TIEs
1. If the slot next to an installed RDTU or RPTU is vacant, 24 line or channels will be installed; If the slot next to an
installed RDTU or RPTU is occupied by another PCB, 16 lines or channels will be installed.
Table 1-4
Auto-Programming of Line Groups and Service Types
OLG
ILG
CO line type
CO Service Type
Prog 306
Prog 304
RCOU/RCOS and RGLU analog loop
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
and ground start
1
1
(200 or 2000 see Table 5)
RDDU analog DID
1
2
DID, wink no default DID numbers
RDTU (T1)
1
3
DID no default DID numbers
Direct In Termination (DIT) to the first PDN.
RMCU/RMCS analog CAMA
1
-
(200 or 2000 see next table)
RBUU/RBUS and RBSU ISDN BRI -
set as CO side
2
4
DID no default DID numbers
ISDN PRI
2
5
DID no default DID numbers
REMU analog E&M
3
6
Non-Strata Net
1. The line number is assigned to all lines in the numerical order according to the line PCB cabinet placements.
Example: Line number 1 will be on the first circuit of the line PCB placed in the lowest cabinet/slot number.
2. OLG:1 is created even if there is are no analog line PCBs installed.
1-4
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-5
Auto-Programming of Miscellaneous Line Parameters
Progra
Item
Settings
Str
All of the ringing destinations of DIT lines are the first PDN:
a
DIT line ringing assignment
t
mming
a
PDN 200 for CIX100, CIX200 and Basic Processor CIX670 (1~2 cabinet)
C
Program 310
IX
PDN2000 for Expanded Processor CIX670. (3~7 cabinets)

DID numbers - not assigned.
The destination of DID is not assigned. DID numbers and ringing
destinations must be assigned manually from Strata eManager or the
Program 309
programming telephone.
Format Setting for DIT (T1)
Zero Code Suppress = B8ZS, Frame Format = ESF.
The destination of internal notification is the first DN 200 or 2000 in the all
Setting for CAMA / E911
operation mode (DAY1, Day2, and Night).
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
BRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
Setting for ISDN BRI CO
BRI interface in the order in which the BRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.
Common D channel is not assigned. 1 channel group is assigned to each
PRI PCB installed. The channel group number is assigned in order to each
Setting for ISDN PRI CO
PRI interface in the order in which the PRI PCBs are installed. The
destination of DID is not assigned.
The node number and the other setting for networking are not assigned
Setting for E&M Tie lines
automatically
The destination of Program 318, No Calling Party Number and Out Of Search for DID number, is assigned
to the first Primary DN of the system (200 or 2000) in the all system operating modes (Day1,Day 2, and
Night).
The DIT line (ground and loop) destinations of all trunks which generated automatically are set as the first
PDN 200 or 2000 depending on the system size see Table 1-4.
LIPU / BIPU Settings
Table 1-6
BIPU-M Automatic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
Card Type
Card Type
BIPU
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254.200
IP Address (BIPU)
IP address of BIPU
.201
.202/.......
Private address will be set.
Subnet mask of BIPU
Subnet mask (BIPU)
255.255.255.0
substrate
Default gateway of BIPU
Default gateway
0.0.0.0
substrate
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-5

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-7
IPT Automatic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
The number plan conforms to BDKU16.
DN setting of the terminal
DN Setting
accommodated in BIPU
Assigned in the order of the lowest slot
number.
Accommodated terminal setting
Parameter setting of Station
Station ID = PDN
(Station ID)
ID in BIPU
Accommodated terminal setting
Parameter setting of IP
IP address = 0.0.0.0
(IP Address)
address in BIPU
Accommodated terminal setting
Parameter setting of MAC
MAC addresses = (no data)
(MAC addresses)
addresses in BIPU
Table 1-8
System Related Basic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
Use of Diffserv: Not applicable
Setting of priority control by
Set value of DSField = 0
QOS Control
Diffserv/IEEE802.1p
Use of IEEE802.1p: Not applicable
Priority level: Voice
Automatic setting of Station
Station ID
Not allowed
ID
Application or non application
Terminal authentication setting
of connection restriction
Not apply
function using MAC address
BIPU-Q1A Initial Programming
After initializing the CIX System with BIPU for Strata Net over IP, Strata CIX detects the BIPU card for
Strata Net over IP and basic programming is set automatically.
Table 1-9
BIPU-Q1A Automatic Settings
Item
Description
Settings
Card Type
Card Type
BIPU-Q1A
In the order of smallest number of the slot
where BIPU is inserted
192.168.254 .800 for 1st BIPU
IP Address (BIPU)
IP address of BIPU-Q1A
.801 for 2nd BIPU
.802 for 3rd BIPU
Private address will be set.
Subnet mask (BIPU)
Subnet mask of BIPU-Q1A
255.255.255.0
Default gateway
Default gateway of BIPU-Q1A 0.0.0.0
1-6
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-10
IP-Trunk Information
Progra
Program
Description
Settings
Str
ILG Number
7
at
mming
a
ILG
Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN)
ISDN
CIX
Type of Trunk
TIE

OLG Number
4
OLG
Kind of Trunk (Analog/ISDN)
ISDN
Type of Trunk
TIE
1: 1st BIPU
CG Number
2: 2nd BIPU
3: 3rd BIPU
ISDN Trunk
Type of Protocol
IP
ILG
7
OLG
4
Voice Coding Procedure
CODEC (G.711, G.729A)
G.711
Index of Voice attribute table
(1~256)
1
Packet Interval:
20ms
Type of Jitter buffer:
Fixed
Size of Jitter buffer:
1
Parameter of voice attribute table -
Max Acceptable Delay:
1
Measure Time:
1000ms
Packet Loss Ratio:
5
Packet discard ratio:
5
D-ch Establish/Release
D-ch Establish/Release
D-ch Release by Call Released
Fast Connect Procedure
-
Apply
Negotiation
Negotiation of H.245
Un-Apply
IP address for Node ID
IP Address
IP address
Table 1-11
System Information
Item
Description
Settings
Diffserv:
Disable
Priority Control by Diffserv.
DS Field:
0
QoS Control
IEEE802.1p
IEEE802.1p :
Disable
Priority:
Voice
(6)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-7

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
CIX Processor NIC Interface TCP/IP Auto-programming
The following are the initial values of the LAN data that is automatically created for the system.
· Network TCP/IP. See "916 IP Configuration" on page 10-15.
· IP address 192.168.254.253
· Sub network master 255.255.255.0
· Default gateway 0.0.0.0
· IP routing table Not used.
· SNMP Agent settings
· Community name communityName
· IP address 0.0.0.0 (not restricted by the IP address of the access source)
· Privileges WRITE
· community-id 1
· Use r level Super user
· Trap destination
· Community name Nothing
· IP address Nothing
· Modem PPP Server settings
· IP Address 192.168.255.254 (Strata CIX modem fixed IP address for Dial-up connections).
Public Numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Numbers (Program 117)
Public Numbering Plan Public Numbering Plan
Analyzed Number
Analyzed Digit Number
1NXX
11
N11
3
NXX
7
N = 2~9 and X = 0~9
E911 Emergency Call to Outgoing Line Group (Program 550)
Emergency Call Group
OLG1
Number
1
1
E911 Emergency Call Destination (Program 400)
System Mode
Emergency Call Called Number Index
Emergency Call Called Number
DAY1
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
DAY2
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
NIGHT
1
200 or 2000 (the first PDN)
The emergency call destination is set for the first PDN as 200 or 2000 in the all operation mode (DAY1, Day2, NIGHT).
Table 1-12
Program 204 Default Data
In Program 204, all telephones are programed as 20 buttons.
1-8
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Use Default Auto-programming to Start Up
Table 1-13
Program 102 New Default Data
Progra
Feature
St
Default Value
Function
Code
rat
mming
a
870
#963
Call Monitor Log Off
CIX
Table 1-14
Program 205/213/215 New Default Data

Feature Code
Function
870
Call Monitor Feature Button
Table 1-15
Program 313 Default Data
Caller
Prog 313
Function
ID
FB1
Caller ID Receive Method
nothing/ANI-MCI/ANI-Sprint/CLASS
Caller ID Identification
FB2
ANI and DNIS/DNIS/DID
Notice Contents
Underlined entry is CIX00 and CIX200 default
Table 1-16
Program 100 Default Data
Virtual
Slot
PCB
Station Line
Circuits
Connection
Equip.
Code
Numbers
Nos. *
0101
8 - Digital Telephones (no spkr OCA)
017
200~207
GMAU1A
0102
3 - CO lines, with CLID
028
CO1~CO3
(motherboard)
0103
Not used
01~208
01-GMAU1A
0104
Standard Telephone 01~02
026
02~217
02-GSTU1A
026
0105
4 - Voice Mail ports
220~223
GVMU1A
0106
Not used
0107
8 - Digital Telephones
017
209~216
GCDU1A
0108
3 - CO Lines with CLID
028
CO4~CO6
Relay Contact
0205
Virtual BIOU
020
GCTU1A
Page, MOH
*Slot codes are set during system initialization and cannot be changed.
Default Feature Access Codes
Refer to "102 Flexible Access Codes" on page 4-4.
Note For DKTs, assign only the PDN numbers. Do not program any other Flexible Buttons or features in
to the phones. Strata CIX automatically recognizes and sets up digital telephone stations.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-9

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Plan Your System Requirements
Step 2: Plan Your System Requirements
Plan for your Strata CIX system requirements in detail before beginning your installation. Use record
sheets wherever they are provided to document your installation requirements. The following are some
areas to consider:
· Flexible Numbering Plan (102) Planning your Flexible Numbering requirements is essential to a
smooth installation. Trunk group access and station range requirements are especially important areas
of consideration.
· COS (103) Determine the Class of Service (COS) requirements for your station and trunk groups.
There are up to 32 possible COS plans.
· DRL (111) Define up to 16 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) assignments.
Important!
Destination Restriction is an expanded feature of what has traditionally been known as Toll
Restriction. Toll Restriction is only one facet of Strata CIX's Destination Restriction feature.
Refer to Destination Restriction in this manual when programming Toll Restriction
requirements.
· FRL and QPL (506) Define up to 16 Facilities Restriction Level (FRL) and Queuing Priority Level
(QPL) assignments.
Step 3: Program the CIX for First Time
Follow the steps below to program the Strata CIX for the first time. Following this initial setup procedure
enables you to perform a standard Strata CIX setup with common System and Station default assignments.
Toshiba recommends adherence to these procedures for initial setup.
1. Card Assignments (100) Choose Advanced Configuration > System > Card Assignment. It is not
necessary to physically install PCBs prior to programming Strata CIX.
If you physically install your PCBs prior to initial setup, Strata eManager automatically recognizes
PDKU, BDKU/BDKS, RSTU, RCOU/RCOS and RGLU PCBs and assigns default stations and trunks
automatically. All other PCBs are assigned manually. See "100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments" on
page 4-1 for more details.
2. ILG Assignment (304) Choose Trunk > ILG to assign Incoming Line Groups (ILG). See "304
Incoming Line Group Assignment" on page 6-2 for more details. ILGs enable line groupings of shared
Class of Service features for incoming call handling.
3. OLG Assignment (306) Choose Trunk > OLG to assign Outgoing Line Groups (OLG). See "306
Outgoing Line Groups" on page 6-5 for more details.
4. Trunk Assignment (300) Choose Trunk > Basic. Set up your Trunks in the following order (see "300
Trunk Assignment" on page 6-7 for more details):
· Loop Start Trunks
· Ground Start Trunks
· T1 Trunks
· Tie lines
· FX lines
· PR I lines
· BRI lines
5. Station Assignment (200) Choose Station > Basic. Set up your stations in the following order (see
"Assignment" on page 5-1 for more details):
1-10
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Program the CIX for First Time
· DKT Stations
· IP Stations
Progra
St
· Standard Stations
rat
mming
a
· Voice Mail (VM) Ports
CIX
· Attendant Positions

· Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Pilot DNs
· Door Phones
6. Create Station Links Create the following groups wherever applicable and set stations to link as
necessary.
· Hunt Groups using Programs 209 and 218
· Paging Groups using Program 502
· Call Pickup Groups using Program 210
· Park Orbits using Program 102
· Paging Devices using Program 503
7. Backup Data Choose Operation\Data Backup. Make sure the SmartMedia card is properly formatted
(see "Restoring Data from SmartMedia" on page 10-2) prior to running backup. See "910 Data
Backup" on page 10-14 for details.
8. Continue programming Strata CIX details.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-11

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Program the CIX for First Time
Review Program Flow
The basic program flow needed to set up Strata CIX is shown below. The figure displays the most critical
programs in the left column and migrates right to optional programs. Also, programming flows from
specific (left) to general (right).
Card Assignment
(Program 100)
LS Trunks
GS Trunks
Admin
T1 Trunks
Tie Trunks
Create ILGs
FX Trunks
(Program 304)
PRI Trunks
BRI Trunks
Services
Create OLGs
DKT Stations
(Program 306)
STD Stations
LCR / TR
VM Ports
Attd Positions
Pilot DNs (ACD)
Recommended*
Door Phones
BRI Lines
System Program
Planning the following
before proceeding:
Flexible Numbering Plan
(Program 102)
Trunk Group Access Plan
Station Range Plan
Hunt Group
Create COS Plan (up to 32)
Paging Group
(Program 103)
Call P.U. Group
Park Orbits
Create DRL (up to 16)
(Program 111, 532 - 533)
Paging Devices
Define FRL and QPL
meanings (up to 16)
* Planning these details in advance
enables Strata setup to proceed smoothly.
1-12
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Identify Program Sequences
Step 4: Identify Program Sequences
Progra
Use the following tables to quickly identify the programs needed to fulfill your setup requirements. See the
Str
Index to correlate program numbers and their functions.
at
mming
a C
Station Setup
IX
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up Station requirements.
Station
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
DKT
PDN
100
200
204
208
205
PhDN
205
206
DADM
204
213
DDSS
214
215
Attd
100
200
204
208
Ext
100
200
208
VM
100
200
204
206
209
218
579
580
ISDN
Ext
100
202
217
Pilot DN
540
Station Hunting
209
218
Call Pickup Groups
210
Emergency Ringdown
216
Paging Groups
502
Station Speed Dial
516
Trunk Setup Analog
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up analog Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
300
Ring
310
LS/GS
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Tie line
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Ring
309
Timer
308
DID
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-13

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Identify Program Sequences
Trunk Setup T1
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up T1 Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
LS/GS
Ring
310
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
Tie line
Timer
308
DISA
311
Basic
100
304
306
300
Data
315
Ring
309
DID
Timer
308
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
Trunk Setup ISDN PRI
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up ISDN PRI Trunk requirements.
Trunk
Assignment
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Type
Basic
100
304
306
302
320
Ring
309
Timer
308
DID
DISA
311
DNIS/ANI
313
Intercept
318
319
CNIS
321
322
Basic
100
304
306
302
320
Tie line
Ring
309
Timer
308
D-share
100
304
306
302
320
316
CBC
100
3041
3061
3022
320
3233
Notes
1. Each CBC Group may require one ILG and one OLG.
2. Do not assign ILG/OLG using this program.
3. Assign ILG and OLG using Program 323.
1-14
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Identify Program Sequences
Miscellaneous
Progra
Use the following table to quickly access the programs needed to set up other Strata CIX features.
Strat
Feature
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
mming
a C
Account-Codes
570
571
103
506
306
IX
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
103
208
104
Automatic Call Back (ACB)
104
Automatic Camp-On
304
Auto-Release of CO
308
Background-Music (BGM)
102
103
109
Call Forwarding
103
200
217
Call History
204
205
Call Park Orbit
104
102
Call Xfer W/ Camp-On
103
COS-Station
200
202
COS-CO
304
306
Credit-Card Calling
105
111
306
Day/Night service
500
106
112
113
103
105
Identification Services
309
318
579
Digital PAD
107
114
Direct Inward Dialing
309
318
304
DISA
311
Direct Inward Termination
304
310
Do not Disturb (DND)
103
204
205
102
Door Lock Control
104
204
508
205
Door Phones
102
507
573
DTMF DP Compatible
104
DTMF Back Tone
204
DTMF Signal Time
579
104
E911
200
105
217
550
104
306
202
Executive Override
103
105
External Ringing Repeat
300
204
Flash
308
205
102
103
Flexible Numbering
102
Group Paging
502
503
102
Least-Cost-Routing (LCR)
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
528
529
103
Line Group
304
305
306
307
317
302
323
300
Message-Waiting Light
204
102
579
Music-on-Hold
102
105
109
309
310
Off-Hook Camp-on
104
200
217
Network Call Incoming
102
656
Network Call Outgoing
102
651
653
654
655
Out-Going calls
200
217
104
Ringing-Transfer
105
SMDI
200
202
579
580
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
1-15

Strata CIX Programming Guidelines
Identify Program Sequences
Feature
Run Programs in Sequence from left to right.
Station CO Line Access
204
SMDR
512
513
514
803
801
804
Tandem Connection
103
104
300
DR Override by System's
Speed Dial
105
Destination Restriction
200
202
306
650
530
531
532
533
534
Tone-First/Voice-First
204
206
Travelling COS
105
200
510
Voice-Mail Interface
See "Telephone Station
100
200
209
218
579
580
803
804
309
318
Ports" on page A-2
Emergency Ring-Down
216
Relay Services
515
System Call-Forward
200
217
104
500
504
Call Pick Up
210
103
200
205
102
1-16
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
2
St
Introduction
rata e
The Strata CIX systems are programmed using eManagerTM. eManager R4.0 (R400A14 or later) can be
Ma
used to program all CIX and CTX systems. This chapter shows how to install Strata eManager software on
nag
your PC and discusses how to connect that PC to the Strata CIX system. This section includes the process
er
for using eManager on the MAS or a stand-alone PC.
TM
eManager
eManager is a powerful telephone system administration tool used to program, maintain and upgrade the
Strata CIX Digital Business Telephone System and Stratagy ES Voice Mail System. eManager resides on
the Media Application Server (MAS). eManager can be loaded on a Server with network access to the CIX
or on a laptop PC (see "Install or Upgrade eManager Software" on page 2-5 for specifications).
eManager combines administration and management of the two previously separate applications,
telephone system and voice mail into combined menus, allowing technicians and system administrators to
program both together, and eliminate many duplicate steps. New User Profile is designed to record
equipment, user privileges, and authenticate the users during login. The User Profile allows organizing the
equipment into domain groups of networked systems and presenting them in a tree. The user can select on
the tree which equipment they want to access for administration.
eManager is a Web browser-based application that resides on the Strata Media Application Server. The
eManager application can also be loaded on a separate server connected to the CIX network if the customer
prefers.
eManager can be accessed locally over the LAN or, with proper network security, remotely over the
Internet, and because it is used from the user's Web browser, no special software is required to be loaded
on the user's client PC. The Web browser must be Windows Internet Explorer 6.0 or above.
eManager on the MAS can be used through the keyboard and monitor connected to the MAS or from any
PC with network access using the Windows XP remote desktop function.
Note At this time eManager only supports Microsoft Windows Internet Explorer. Other browsers are not
supported.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-1

Strata eManager TM
eManager
Connect to eManager
Network Connection
To access eManager on the MAS point the browser to the IP Address of the MAS from a PC on the network
the address line would be: http://<IP Address>/eManager. To access the eManager locally on the MAS
keyboard, on a local PC or laptop enter: http://localhost/eManager. This connection allows
programming the CIX and the Stratagy Enterprise Server voice mail.
This chapter shows how to install Strata eManager software on your PC and discusses how to connect that
PC to the Strata CIX system. This chapter discusses the installation of eManager on a stand-alone PC, and
includes the process for using eManager on the MAS or on a stand-alone (local host) PC. For details on the
programming commands refer to the Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 1.
CIX
LAN
Switch
PC with Internet Explorer
(browser)
MAS
PC with eManager
(optional)
Optional:
KB, Monitor
and mouse
Figure 2-1 eManager Access via Network Connection
To access the eManager on the MAS point the browser to the IP Address of the MAS from a PC on the
network the address line would be: http://<IP Address>/eManager. To access the eManager locally on
the MAS keyboard, on a local PC or laptop enter: http://localhost/eManager.
Modem Connection to CIX
A PC with eManager installed can use a dial-up modem connection to the CIX optional internal modem.
This connection allows eManager access to only the CIX. Refer to Figure 2-2 on Page 2-3.
Modem Connection to MAS
An eManager dial-up connection can be made directly to a MAS through an optional USB modem. Refer
to Chapter 17 of this manual for installation instructions. eManager connection to a MAS through the
modem allows programming access to the MAS applications. Other items on the same LAN such as the
MAS, including the CIX or iEs16/32 can also be programmed through this connection.
Remote Desktop
A PC can use the Remote Dasktop function of Windows® XP toaccess the MAS..
2-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
Set up Modem Connection (Optional)
Step 1: Connect eManager PC to Strata CIX Modem
Connect an RJ11 cable from your PC modem to an active phone line or to a RSTU or LSLU port. See
Figure 2-2.
Local eManager
CIX
Processor
Stra
AMDS
ta
Modem
Dial #19
Modem
eManag
Analog Circuit
er TM
Telephone
Modem
CO Line
CO Line
Network
Circuit
CO Line
Remote eManager
Figure 2-2 Strata eManager Modem Interface Connection
Step 2: Programming and Operation
The modem connection can be established one of two ways; Direct ring or Transfer.
· Direct ring connection over CO lines
Advanced Configuration > Trunk > DID lines: assign "Built-in Modem" as the Audio Day1, Day,
and/or Night destination type.
Advanced Configuration > Trunk > Assignments > DIT ground/loop start lines: assign "Built-in
Modem" as the Day1, Day2, and/or Night destination type.
When connected to RSTU, ASTU or LSLI or DISA line: put "#19" in Strata eManager Phone
Number dial string.
· Transfer an eManager call to the Strata CIX modem from a CIX Auto Attendant or telephone
After receiving the call from the eManager user, press Cnf/Trn or hook flash and dial #19 then hang up
after receiving CIX modem tone.
Note If calling an Auto Attendant put "xxxxxxx,,,,,,,, #19" in the eManager Phone Number dial string.
Where "xxxxxxx" is the site phone number and each "," adds a three-second delay before dialing
#19 to connect to the modem.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-3

Strata eManager TM
Install eManager
Install eManager
eManager is installed on every MAS when it is shipped to the customer site. The following information
details the upgrade of the eManager on the MAS or the installation of eManager on another PC.
eManager PC Minimum Requirements
A PC with network access to the CIX or MAS should have the following minimum requirements:
· Windows® XP Pro SP1 (Refer to Note below)
· Internet Explorer version 6.00 or higher
· Microsoft Add-On Components:
· IIS
· Management and Monitoring Tools
Note The Windows XP Professional (as appropriate) CD-ROM must be available if any of the above are
not already installed.
· Pentium 400 MHz processor
· 512MB RAM
· 1.6GB of free hard disk storage
· CD-ROM drive
· SVGA card and color monitor
· mouse
· keyboard
· 10/100BaseT Network Interface Card
Notes
If the system is running Windows XP Pro with SP2 the Fire wall that is automatically included and
l
enabled in XP Pro - SP2 prevents login to eManager. When running XP Pro-SP2 you should turn
off the Fire wall, or follow the firewall configuration guides in the MAS Installation section.
The pop-up blocker in all Windows applications, anti-virus and other applications must also be
l
turned off.
Anti-Virus Software
When a system has access to the internet anti-virus protection is recommended. Refer to Table 2-1 for the
list of approved applications. The table below lists the anti-virus applications that are tested and approved for the
MAS and will function correctly with eManager.
Table 2-1
Anti-Virus Software
Application
Configuration Notes
PC-cillinTM Internal Security 2005
Should not be run in batch mode when running any other applications.
Symantec's Norton Anti-VirusTM 2005
Script blocking option must be un-checked.
McAfee® Virusscan® 2005 Ver. 9.0
Script blocking option must be un-checked.
2-4
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Install eManager
Install or Upgrade eManager Software
There are three software components required by eManager; MSDE, Profile Database and the eManager
application, these components are installed by the eManager installation script. If you are upgrading an
existing system the eManager exe-file will identify and then install the necessary components. It is not
necessary to remove the older eManager, the install program will overwrite it.
Note
eManager and WinAdmin can be installed on the same PC. The programs do not interfere with one
another. eManager is recommended for all systems and is required for all R3.0 and later systems.
S
CAUTION!
Do not open and/or run other applications during installation as this may corrupt the
tra
installation and/or other software on your PC. Installation may take several minutes.
ta eMan
1. Insert the Strata eManager CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. Click Install Strata eManager....
ag
er
2. A screen with information that eManager will only run on Windows XP Pro will appear. Click on
TM
Continue.
3. The CD-ROM runs a Pre-installation check, determines the OS you have, then checks for all other
software requirements. A screen will appear with the message that; All requirements have been found.
Click on Install eManager Now.
If your PC did not pass the Pre-installation check and a requirement was not found: see the details
in "Requirements Not Found" on page 2-7.
4. If the security warning shown below appears click on Run.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-5

Strata eManager TM
Install eManager
5. If you are installing eManager on a PC that used to run an earlier version of eManager, keep the Profile
database when the install program prompts you to save it click on Yes.
6. Wait for the Setup User Account for eManager screen. Click on Next.
7. The system will prompt for a password. This password, for the Manager account, is required to
complete the installation and run eManager but is never used..
8. A License Agreement dialog box will open. Read the license agreement then click on Yes.
9. The Choose Destination Location box will open. Accept the default destination by clicking on Next.
10.The Install Shield Wizard will start the installation process. This will take a few minutes.
11.When the Install Shield Finished screen appears, select Yes, Restart my computer now. Then click
on Finish.
12.The computer will restart. When it is finished launch eManager.
13.Login to eManager.
14.If an eManager Profile Database was saved. A dialog box saying that the updb.dll has been registered
will appear. Click on OK. Then login to eManager again.
2-6
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Verify the CIX System IP Address
Requirements Not Found
This section is only for use in the event the PC did not pass the Pre-installation check. If your system has
passed the pre check skip to the next section.
The installer will prompt you to insert the Windows XP Pro CD. Follow the screen prompts to install the
missing items. When the installs are complete return the eManager installation.
Verify the CIX System IP Address
S
The default IP Address for the Strata CIX is 192.168.254.253, it may be necessary to change this address.
tra
Check with the network administrator or I.T. department for the CIX system IP Address.
ta eM
Refer to the Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 1 for details on changing the IP address.
anag
er TM
Access eManager
eManager is a browser based application. Internet Explorer (IE) version 6.00 or later is required. The
eManager resides on the MAS. The eManager application can be loaded on a Server with network access
or a laptop PC. Accessing the CIX or the applications on the MAS can be done:
· From a remote PC with internet access to a CIX or a MAS
· From a PC with eManager loaded and with network access to the CIX or MAS
· From the Keyboard and monitor connected to the MAS.
· From a PC with eManager loaded with dial-up modem access to a CIX equiped with the optional
AMDS.
Access the eManager on the MAS from a Remote PC
The eManager on the MAS can be accessed by any PC with network access to the MAS. If the MAS has a
monitor, keyboard and mouse attached eManager can be accessed while at the MAS location. Remote
access to eManager can be done by using Internet Explorer to browse to eManager or the Windows XP
remote Desktop feature can be used to directly access the MAS desktop. To access the MAS or other server
with eManager start IE, enter http://<computer name or IP Address>/emanager in the address field.
Once eManager is accessed the user must login.
Access the Strata CIX or MAS using eManager on a local laptop or PC
Any PC with eManager loaded and access to the CIX and the MAS LAN can be used. To access the CIX,
the MAS or other server with eManager start IE, enter http://localhost/emanager in the address field.
Once eManager is started the user must login then select the equipment to connect with.
Using the eManager Dial-up Modem
To utilize the dial-up modem to access a CIX system:
1. The CIX system must have the optional modem installed on the processor card.
2. The eManager equipment profile must be configured. Access the profile screen in eManager. Create an
equipment profile in eManager for the dial-up connection. The IP address of a CIX over the Dial-Up
connection is fixed: 192.168.255.254. Enter the phone number of the CIX system modem.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-7

Strata eManager TM
Log on to eManager
Log on to eManager
1. From Microsoft Internet Explorer window, type http://
<PC Name>/emanager and press Enter. The eManager
window displays (shown right).
2. Type the User Name (default is Administrator) in the
User Name field.
3. Type the password (default is password) in the Password
field.
Note For security reasons, if you haven't changed the
default password you can change it now.
7457
Select CIX Equipment
4. Click Login. The
Select CIX System
screen displays
(shown at right).
5. Select the Strata
CIX Network
Domain from the
left hand portion of
the screen and click
Connect. The
eManager Main
192.168.255.254
Menu displays (see
"eManager Main
Screen" on
page 2-16).
...or if no Network
Domains appear in
the window, you
must go to the
eManager Profile to
add them.
Important!
If the system is configured to connect to Stratagy and CIX and the Stratagy Voice Mail
System is not running, you receive a warning that you cannot connect to the MAS (Media
Application Server) and log onto the voice mail portion of the eManager program. Check the
Strata CIX Programming Manual Volume 2 for Stratagy ES Voice Mail System for
instructions on starting and licensing Stratagy ES.
2-8
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Log on to eManager
Using the eManager Dial-up Modem
To utilize the dial-up modem to access a CIX system:
1. The CIX system must have the optional modem installed on the processor card.
2. The eManager equipment profile must be configured. Access the profile screen in eManager. Create an
equipment profile in eManager for the dial-up connection. The IP address of a CIX over the Dial-Up
connection is fixed: 192.168.255.254. Enter the phone number of the CIX system modem.
Strata eManag
er TM
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-9

Strata eManager TM
eManager Profile
eManager Profile
The eManager User's Profile database creation and initialization is required the first time you login to
eManager. Login Accounts allows the system administrator to setup user names and passwords, and to
assign the level of access that user has to the system.
Step 1: Login Accounts
This screen is for administrating (adding/deleting/modifying) access levels and users for the eManager
(CIX/Stratagy ES) system.
1. Log on to eManager.
2. Click on eManager Profile > Login
Accounts from the menu.The User
Editor screen displays (shown right).
3. If this is the first time you have
accessed this screen, select
Administrator from the drop-down
menu.
...or select the appropriate user's name
from the list.
4. Fill in the appropriate fields based on
the descriptions found in See "Table
Views" on Page 2-20.
5. Click Add, Modify, or Delete.
6. To exit the screen and return to the
previous screen, click Back.
Table 2-1
Login Accounts Screen Fields
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Enter the new User name. The default user name of the administrator is Administrator.
Possible values: Alphanumeric characters.
Note
The administrator user name cannot be changed.
Password
Enter the new password. The initial password is password. This password can be
changed by the administrator or user. The password is case sensitive.
To protect User Passwords, open Internet Explorer and go to Tools > Internet Options >
Content > Autocomplete. Uncheck User Names and Password on forms, then click on
Clear Passwords.
CAUTION!
Be sure to change the default password to protect the system from
unauthorized access. Record all your passwords that use Internet
Explorer.
Possible values: Alphanumeric characters.
Confirm Password
Repeat password entered in Password field.
Possible values: Alphanumeric characters.
2-10
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
eManager Profile
Table 2-1
Login Accounts Screen Fields
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Access Levels
Multiple users can access the program at one time. There are four access levels:
· Level 1: Complete access to all system administrative functions. Creates and deletes
all other access levels.
· Level 2: Given privileges by Level 1. Can assign department levels. Only Level 1 that
created Level 2 can delete or reset the password.
· Level 3: Takes care of departmental administration. This level can be assigned the
following responsibilities for specified mailboxes: define class of service; set up user's
St
Options, Auto schedule and Notify screens; and report generating capabilities.
rata
· Level 4: The single client/user has access to only his/her personal objects.
eMa
Note Access to menu functions vary by access level. Functions that are disabled
n
appear grayed out on the menu.
ag
er
Directory Folder Name If left blank, system uses the user's name from the first field.
TM
Assign to Self
Assigns equipment control to this user.
Allowed to Mod/Del
Allows this user to modify or delete equipment.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-11

Strata eManager TM
eManager Profile
Step 2: Equipment Editor
This program is for adding, modifying or deleting equipment. If you enter the information for both the
CIX and Stratagy ES (SES) as one piece of equipment, the menu you view will be a blended menu of both
CIX and Stratagy options (see "Program Menu" on page 2-16).
If you want the option of viewing only CIX programming or only Stratagy ES programming, you need to
create/enter the equipment separately in this screen. For example: For CIX only, leave the IP Address for
the SES blank and for Stratagy only, leave the CIX fields blank.
1. Log on to eManager.
2. Click on eManager Profile > Equipment Editor from the menu.The Equipment Editor screen displays
(shown right).
3. To add a Domain name, click Add and enter the name in the pop-up box. Click OK
Note The creation of a domain name is not mandatory. A piece of equipment can be added directly to the
root (network).
...or to rename a Domain, select it from the drop-down menu and click Rename. Type the name in the
pop-up box. Click OK
...or to delete a Domain name, select it from the drop down menu and click Delete.
4. In the Equipment section, fill in the appropriate fields based on the descriptions shown in Table 2-1
below.
5. Click Add, Modify, or Delete.
6. To cancel your entries and clear the screen, click Clear.
Table 2-2
Equipment Editor Screen Fields
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Name
Name designating the equipment. For example: CIX999.
Possible values: alphanumeric characters
CIX
IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the CIX system. For example: 192.168.254.253 (default).
Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Community
Enter the Community password.
Possible values: Alpha characters
Default:
communityName
Modem
Enter the modem diretory number.
Click to check mark the Use Dia; Up box
Confirm Community
Re-enter the Community password.
SES
IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the Media Server. For example: 192.168.254.252 (default).
Format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
2-12
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
eManager Profile
Step 3: Classes Setup
Assigns equipment, menus, parameters, and functions to each Login Account User.
1. Logon to eManager.
2. Click on eManager Profile > Classes Setup
from the menu.The Classes Setup screen
displays (shown right).
3. To edit a User Name, select a User Name
from the drop-down menu and click Edit.
S
The Login Accounts screen displays.
trat
4. In the Equipment section, you can assign
a e
or not assign specific equipment by
Ma
highlighting the item and clicking the
nag
arrow buttons on the screen.
er TM
The designated equipment moves from one
box to the other based on the arrow you
selected.
5. If you want to edit the equipment, click
Edit in the Equipment box and the
Equipment Editor screen displays.
6. In the Menu, Parameters and Functions
fields you can assign one of the default
levels to the User Name or click More and modify the list(s) for the individual user.
Menus: Options that have an arrow (!) next to them can be expanded further. If you un-check an option
it will be grayed out for this user in eManager menu.
Parameters: A list is displayed showing the CIX commands/parameters that are available along with
the permission given (H hide, R read, W write). For example, if you change an option from W to
R the user can only read but not write to that parameter.
Functions: A list is displayed showing the functions available. Un-check a function when you do not
want it available to the user.
After making the changes to the list, click Save As and type a name for the new list in the pop-up box.
Click Back.
7. When you are finished making the changes to the screen and want to apply these specifications to all
equipment, check the field "Apply to All Equipment" and click Set
...or un-check the "Apply to All Equipment" field and highlight the equipment in the Assigned box that
applies to the revised defaults. Click Set.
In this manner, you can set different defaults for different pieces of equipment.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-13

Strata eManager TM
eManager Profile
Step 4: DB Utility
This function allows you to back up your eManager database. This utility is also useful when upgrading the
eManager software.
ä To access the screen
1. Logon to eManager.
2. Click on eManager Profile > DB Utility
from the menu.The DB Utility screen
displays (shown right).
ä To backup the profile database
1. Check Database Backup.
2. Type into the Browse field C:backup or
browse to the location and click Submit.
ä To import a partial profile database
1. Check Import Partial Database.
2. Click Browse and find the database you
want to import.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select an option
from the Import Selections list.
4. Click Submit.
ä To export a partial profile database
1. Check Export Partial Database.
2. Type c:\export.xls in the Browse field.
3. Highlight the items in the Export Selections box that you want to export.
4. Click Submit.
Backup Database Utility
This procedure backs up the eManager Profile database.
1. Locate and select the eManager program directory on your hard drive. The Backup/Restore screen
displays.
Note The default location for backup/restore program is: C:\eManager\bin\BackupRestore.exe.
2. Click Connect.
3. In the Backup/Restore File Name field, type a file and path name (e.g., c:\backup.bak).
4. Click Backup. The system creates a backup database and the screen displays the progress.
5. When the backup is complete, click Disconnect and close the screen.
2-14
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Options
Restore Database Utility
Important!
Everything must be closed, including eManager, to do a restore.
1. Locate and select the eManager program directory on your hard drive. The Backup/Restore screen
displays.
Note The default location for backup/restore program is: C:\eManager\bin\BackupRestore.exe.
2. Click Browse to select a backup file to restore.
3. Click Restore. The system restores the database and displays the progress on the screen.
S
4. When the restore is complete, click Disconnect and close the screen.
trata eM
Options
anag
This function allows you to update the password and personal directory folder name.
er TM
1. From the Login Manager
menu, click Options. The
Options screen displays
(shown right).
2. Type old and new
passwords in respective
fields and confirm.
3. (Optional) Type a new
directory folder name in
the next field.
4. Click Modify to save the
changes.
7336
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-15

Strata eManager TM
eManager Main Screen
eManager Main Screen
After you start eManager, log in and connect to the CIX, the main screen (shown below) displays. Verify
the information on this screen. It contains the System type and Software version.
Software
Versions
Program Menu
7593
Program Menu
The primary tool used to navigate through eManager. Click to expand or
collapse the Program menu buttons.
·
You can verify the Strata CIX system type and the software version on
the Title screen shown above.
·
You can verify the SES software version
·
You can verify the eManager software version
·
The CIX software version is organized as follows:
Example: AR3.00.MJ033.00
b
A = Country code (USA, Canada, Mexico).
b
R3.00 = Release 1.01
b
MJ0xx.00 = Strata CIX software version.
b
The Program menu consists of three possible configurations--only CIX
options, only Stratagy ES options or a blend of both. What you see depends
upon the equipment you are connected to using the Select CIX screen (see
"Equipment Editor" on page 2-12). The figure to the right shows a blended
menu.
Note The FeatureFlex options on the menu display only when you are
connected to the Stratagy Server (MAS).
2-16
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
eManager Sub-screens
eManager Sub-screens
The eManager operates in a user friendly Windows environment featuring interactive Graphical User
Interface (GUI) screens.The Program Viewer's GUI is arranged to streamline the Strata CIX programming
process (see sample screen below).
Prime DN List
Program Details
Tabs
Strata eM
Program Name
an
and
ag
Number
er TM
Program Menu
Programming functions can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate link in the Program Menu.
· Program Name  Program number and name.
· Program Details  Valid fields/data that pertain to the program.
· Program Tabs  You can access a variety of programs and features by clicking the Program Tabs found
on some of the eManager screens.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-17

Strata eManager TM
eManager Sub-screens
The Day Night Service (Programs 112, 106 and 113) screen is shown in the sample below.
Special Buttons
Program Name/Number
Programming
Parameters
7592
Field Name
Program Blocks
Program and Parameter Descriptions
The following features enable you to browse and program eManager efficiently.
· Program Blocks eManager arranges many related programs in blocks to enable the programmer to
view essential and related programs on one screen.
· Programming Parameters Choose values from scroll down menus.
· Command Group Name Each program number and title is prominently displayed for easy reference.
· Field Name Each Field Name or parameter displays and is coded with a prefix (FB) number for easy
referencing.
· Program and Parameter Descriptions Every program and parameter description displays in a
pop-up window by placing the mouse cursor over the program or parameter information.
2-18
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
eManager Sub-screens
Special Buttons
These buttons appear on some of the eManager screens. Refer to Figure 2-3. Clicking on any button lets
you do the following:
· Create Create a new record using system default values.
· Start Starts a wizard.
· Add/Delete/Modify Enables you to add/delete/modify entry(s). In some programs, click the Add or
Delete button for a dialog box to display. Enter the required data, then click Add or Delete.
· List Lists all data.
Stra
· Table View Displays the appropriate table view. For example, clicking the DR Table View button
ta
displays all the configured DRLs within the system.
eMa
· Get Default Sets the fields to the default.
nag
· Reset Resets to set your Strata CIX to manufacturer's default.
er TM
CAUTION!
By pressing the Reset button, you are authorizing all data to be reset to manufacturing
defaults. Any custom data entered will be lost.
· Submit New data is held in eManager's memory. Your Strata CIX is not updated with the new settings
until the Submit button is clicked.
· Logout Disconnects eManager from Strata CIX and terminates TCP/IP Communications.
Figure 2-3 Special Buttons Example
Special Buttons
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-19

Strata eManager TM
eManager Sub-screens
Table Views
Some programs contain supporting tables views. These tables can be accessed from the Program Menu or
from the program itself, by clicking the Table view button. For example, the System Speed Dial Table
View can be accessed by clicking Advanced Configuration > System >System Spdial then clicking the
System Speed Dial Table View button at the bottom of the screen.
Notes
·
Depending on the speed of your PC and the size of your database, the table may take several minutes
to download.
·
Once table view displays, you can minimize the screen or send it to the background. It is an
independent window that can always be brought back to the front of the screen for reference.
The tables have the following functionality (see table view example below):
Previous
Next
First 25 Entries
Last 25 Entries
Navigation
Control Bar
Column Headers
Sort Indicator
Book Mark
7597
· Navigational controls enable viewing or moving on a table by 25-entry screens. These controls help
sort information found in the table or view the table in full. These controls are found as Previous and
Next buttons above the header.
If you want to print or analyze the table, you can also select All from the Drop down between the
Previous and Next buttons to view the entire table in blocks of 25 entries.
In the Navigation Control bar, every button is dynamically activated or deactivated. For example, in the
figure above the Previous button is not active because the view starts with the first record. The Submit
is also not available because nothing has been changed.
· Sort You can sort tables by clicking on the column header. The direction of the up/down toggles in an
Ascending or Descending sort. The color indicator pointing Up or Down in the Header row indicates
the column by which the sort is performed.
· Bookmark You can bookmark a row on some tables by clicking on the row. This enables you to move
forward and backward and come back to the original position with no problem.
Note The bookmark function is not provided in tables that have a Delete button, example "Table Views"
on page 2-20. Tables that have a Delete button also have Select All and Unselect All buttons.
2-20
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
· Edit/Refresh/Print buttons You can edit, refresh or print the table by clicking the appropriate buttons
at the top of the screen. In some tables the Edit button toggles between View Collected Data and Edit.
Clicking the Edit button displays the following screen.
· The Edit function works for the Name, Number and Destination columns.
· Use the Refresh button if you add, delete or make changes to table entries, in Programs that feed tables
or in Guide pages.
· The Print button enables you to print tables. However, when you click the Print button, only the part of
the table that is displayed on the screen prints. Use the scroll bar to Print beyond what is displayed. It
will then automatically print from where the last screen ended.
Strata e
Help Topics
Manag
Help Topics/Context Help
er TM
ä From the eManager Main menu, click Help > Help Topics or Context Help. The CIX Programming
Manual Vol. 1 or the Stratagy Programming Manual will open. Point and click in the Table of Contents
or the Index to find a topic. The search function can be started by clicking on the binocular icon or press
Ctrl + F on the keyboard.
About eManager
ä From the eManager Main menu, click Help > About eManager. A screen displays with software version
numbers.
No Response from Device
While using eManager the error message `No response from device' may appear. The following is a list
of conditions that may cause the problem and suggestions for trouble shooting.
1. The connection parameters in the Profile database Equipment List are incorrect. No CIX is configured
as listed on the network. Check whether the IP Address and the Community Name are correct as shown
in the Equipment List.
2. There is no IP network path between the eManager and the CIX. Ping the CIX from the eManager
server PC to determine if there is a connectivity.
3. Along the network path between eManager and CIX, the SNMP messages are blocked by a network
device (router, fire wall, etc.). Check the network device(s) and fire wall configuration, verify that the
SNMP protocol and its IP ports 161 and 162, also the FTP protocol and its IP ports 20, 21 are not
blocked.
4. Network latency is high due to high traffic, not enough bandwidth. Use network monitoring tools to
verify that SNMP responses from the network location of CIX arrive at the eManager PC location
within 3000 ms.
5. The CIX is turned off or not functioning. Verify that the targeted CIX is turned on and running.
6. The CIX processor is overloaded, the CIX maybe delayed processing SNMP request messages. In this
case the normal SNMP message flow will be restored by CIX the system congestion is cleared up and
the system is running under normal load.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-21

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
Create new connection entry for dial-up
This new connection setup must be completed in order to use the modem in the eManager PC to dial-up a
CIX system. The following steps cover the network connection setup in the PC that must be done to use the
PC modem.
1. In Control Panel Network Connections, select Create a new connection to start the wizard:
2. Click Next:
2-22
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
Strata eManag
er TM
3. Select Connect to the network at my workplace then click Next:
4. Select Dial-up connection, then click Next:
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-23

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
RemoteCTX1
5. Enter RemoteCTX1 as the name of the connection (this entry is case sensitive, must not have any
spaces), then click Next:
6. You must leave the Phone number empty, the phone number will be configured later in the eManager
equipment profile. Click on Next:
2-24
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
RemoteCTX1
Strata eManag
er TM
7. Do not click on the `Add a shortcut' box'. Click Finish, it will create the new entry and pop up the
Connect dialog.
8. Do not make any entries in this dialog box. Click on Properties to continue with the setup:
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-25

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
The CIXModem Properties dialog box will open.
9. Select your modem and configure if necessary, otherwise leave the default values for other fields, also
on the Options Security and Advanced tabs. You must leave the Phone number empty for now, the
phone number will be configured later in the eManager equipment profile. Click on the Networking
tab:
2-26
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
PPP protocol
Strata eManag
er TM
10. Select PPP protocol from the Type of dial-up server I am calling: drop-down list. Uncheck all items
on the other list except TCP/IP. (You cannot uncheck Network Monitor Driver if it is there.) Select
TCP/IP and click Properties:
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
2-27

Strata eManager TM
Help Topics
11. Click to select: Use the following IP address and enter an IP address between 192.168.255.2 and
192.168.255.252. Use an IP address that is not already in use on this PC and its network.
12. Click OK, then OK again to close the Properties.
13. Click Cancel on the Connect CIXModem dialog to close it. The new entry is created in The Network
Connections.
14. The Connect RemoteCTX1 screen will appear. Click on Cancel.
The new network connection entry can be view by going to the Control Panel.
RemoteCTX1
2-28
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Licenses
3
The licenses, shown in Table 3-1, may be necessary for the system, depending on the configuration.
However, if you are only installing release 4.0 on an existing system, without adding features or hardware
(other than processors) no new licenses may be required. Refer to "R4.0 License Generation For CTX100
and CTX670" on Page 3-2.
Table 3-1
New Feature and Hardware License Requirements
License
Required For:
LIC-CIX
CIX System License (Required when using an LIPU card for IP end-points)
(See Note 1)
LIC-CIX-IP PORT
IP Endpoint License (Required for IPT, SIP, and SoftIPT endpoints connected to an
L
(See Note 2)
LIPU card)
icen
LIC-CIX-FF
Feature Flex License (Required when using FeatureFlex)
ses
The system requires one IP System license when using an LIPU card for IP Telephones. Please note that
Strata Net IP, ACD Announce and IP Voice Mail ports, using an LIPU card, do not require an IP System
license.
Notes:
1. Each of the following items requires an IP Port (end point) license each, and one IP System License.
· IPT2000 series
· SIP telephones
· SoftIPT (Also requires a Soft IP License)
Basic Port licenses are required for each of the following when using LIPU/LIPS ports. No IP System
License required. The LIC-CIX is not required to support these items.
· I P Voic e Mail
· IP ACD Announcement port
· IP Attendant Console (Does not require a Soft IP License)
· Strata Net IP trunks (Requires a Strata Net License)
2. IP End-Point Licenses included with the IP System license
· CIX100 and CIX670 ship with four IP End-Point licenses.
· CIX200 ships with 16 IP End-Point licenses.
Please refer to Table 3-5 on Page 6 for a summary of the type and number of licenses required for each
feature.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
3-1

Licenses
Upgrading a CTX100 or CTX670 System to R4.0
Important!
Before generating a R4.0 license for a CIX100 or CIX670 make a backup of the system data
base, and separately make a copy of the current CTX system license key. These backups will
be necessary in the event you wish to return to the older version of software.
When upgrading a CTX-100 or CTX-670 from R3.0 or earlier to Release 4 the following licenses will be
transferred over.
Table 3-2
License Transfer
CTX100 License
CTX670 License
License Function
LIC100-4 PORTS
LIC670-4 PORTS
Four Basic Ports
LIC100-4 DTMF
LIC670-4 DTMF
Four DTMF Decoders
LIC100-QSIG NET
LIC670-QSIG NET
Strata Net
LIC100-SER PORT
LIC670-SER PORT
One Serial Port
LIC-ACD
LIC-ACD
Strata ACD
LIC-ATT
LIC-ATT
Strata Attendant Console
LIC-SOFTIPT-1
LIC-SOFTIPT-1
Strata SoftIPT
R4.0 License Generation For CTX100 and CTX670
To generate a license for a CIX100 or CIX670 for Release 4.0:
1. Login to the Toshiba FYI web site.
2. Select License Codes -> Generation
3. Enter your dealer number
4. Under Choose Product Line select 100S, 100, 200 or 670
5. Under Select Version choose 4.x
6. Then select Standard Generation.
Note Please notice that the new license string will have additional characters. You must use eManager
release 4.0 to apply the license to the system.
Strata Media Application Server Licensing is unchanged. Refer to the Strata CIX and MAS Installation and
Maintenance Manual.
3-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Licenses
System License Example
The following example shows the configuration of an existing CTX670 R2.2 system compared to a new
CIX670 R4.0 system with the same capacities.
The example continues, in steps, through upgrades that include the addition of a Strata MAS with voice
mail ports, new Strata Net IP ports and then the addition of eight new IPTs.
Start with a CTX670 with release 2.2 software. This system has 250 users including 16 SoftIPTs, an
attendant console, four PRI interfaces, 8 analog trunks, and a T1 used for Strata Net.
The configuration of 376 ports is:
· 234 -- DKT Phones (various types)
· 16 -- SoftIPTs
· 1 -- Attendant Console
· 4 -- PRI Circuits (23 trunks each)
· 8 -- Loop start trunk
· 1 -- T1 for Strata Net
The licenses for the existing CTX670 and a new CIX670 R4.0 system are shown in the table below.
Li
EXISTING CTX670
NEW CIX670
cen
ses
QTY.
R2.2
QTY.
R4.0
78
LIC670-4 PORTS
78
LIC-4 BASIC
1
LIC-ATT
1
LIC-ATT
1
LIC670-QSIG NET
1
LIC670-STRATA N
16
LIC-SOFTIPT-1
16
LIC-SOFTIPT-1
To upgraded this R4.0 system to now include Strata Media Application Server with 8 ports of Voice Mail,
raising the system total to 384 ports, the following would be needed:
· 2 -- LIC-4 BASIC
· 1 -- LIPU-X1A circuit card
· 1 -- MAS-8VM-PKG
To upgrade again to add 8 ports of Strata Net over IP, total 392 ports, the following would be required:
· 2 -- LIC-4 BASIC
Note: the LIC670-STRATA N is already present
Note: there are 8 ports available on the LIPU-X1A
If the system is then upgraded to include 20 IPT2008-DSL phones, system total 400 ports:
· 8 -- IPT2008-SDL
· 1 -- LIPS circuit card (installed on top of the LIPU)
· 1 -- LIC-CIX
· 4 -- LIC-CIX-IP PORT (20 are required, 16 were included with the LIC-CIX license)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
3-3

Licenses
License Simplification
In Release R3.1, licensing was simplified, Table 3-3 shows how older licenses MAP into the new license.
Table 3-4 describes the content and use for each license. During the transition period, the old license can
still be applied to their corresponding systems. The new license can be applied to CTX (R2.2x) systems as
well as to CIX systems.
Table 3-3
Previous-to-New License Mapping
Previous Licenses
NEW LICENSE FOR ANY SYSTEM
CTX100
CTX670
CIX200
LIC100-4 PORTS
LIC670-4 PORTS
LIC-CIX-4 BASIC
LIC-4 BASIC
LIC100-4 DTMF
LIC670-4 DTMF
LIC-CIX-4 DTMF
LIC-4 DTMF
LIC100-QSIG NET
LIC100-STRATA N
LIC-CIX-QSIG
LIC200-STRATA N
LIC670-QSIG NET
LIC670-STRATA N
LIC100-SER PORT
LIC670-SER PORT
LIC-CIX-SER PORT
LIC-SER PORT
LIC-ACD
LIC-ACD
LIC-CIX-ACD
LIC-ACD
LIC-ATT
LIC-ATT
LIC-CIX-ATT
LIC-ATT
LIC-SOFTIPT-1
LIC-SOFTIPT-1
LIC-CIX-SOFTIPT
LIC-SOFTIPT
N/A
N/A
LIC-CIX
LIC-CIX
N/A
N/A
LIC-CIX-IP PORT
LIC-CIX-IP PORT
N/A
N/A
LIC-CIX-FF
LIC-CIX-FF
Table 3-4
Licenses for all CIX and CTX Systems
New License
Description
Comments
For Any System
One required for every four ports used for CO lines, DKT
4-port CO Line/Station
or SLT stations, Attendant Consoles, voice mail ports,
LIC-4 BASIC
License for CIX/CTX
Strata Net and ACD announcement ports beyond the
Systems
ports bundled with the system processor.
4-port DTMF Receiver
Required for activation of four DTMF receiver ports
LIC-4 DTMF
License for CIX and CTX number 5 and above on system. Maximum is determined
Systems
by the CTU card in use.
CTX or CIX 100 Strata®
One per CIX 100 system (node) required to network
LIC100-STRATA N
Net Networking
multiple systems using Strata® Net networking.
Application License.
CTX or CIX 200 Strata®
One per CIX 200 system (node) required to network
LIC200-STRATA N
Net Networking
multiple systems using Strata® Net networking.
Application License.
CTX or CIX 670 Strata®
One per CTX or CIX 670 system (node) required to
LIC-670-STRATA N
Net Networking
network multiple systems using Strata® Net networking.
Application License.
(Sheet 1 of 2)
3-4
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Licenses
New License
Description
Comments
For Any System
(continued)
Serial Port License
Required to activate serial port 2, 3 and 4 in Strata CTX
LIC-SER PORT
required for BSIS Ports 2, and CIX systems (license for serial port one included with
3 and 4 for CTX and CIX
BSIS).
Required to activate ACD support in a Strata CIX or CTX
CIX or CTX ACD Server
LIC-ACD
system. (This license is included with ACD turnkey
License
packages and software packages.)
CTX or CIX Attendant
Required to activate Attendant Console support in a
LIC-ATT
Console License
Strata CTX or CIX system.
One required for each SoftIPT application interfaced to
License for one SoftIPT
the Strata CTX or CIX. One LIPU or LIPS or BIPU-M port
LIC-SOFTIPT
user on Strata CIX.
is required for each SoftIPT. Requires IP endpoint license
when connected to LIPU/S.
IP Telephony System
One per system required when using LIPU for IP
LIC-CIX
License for Strata CIX
Endpoints (SoftIPT, IPT phones or SIP phones). Includes
Systems
16 LIC-CIX IP PORT licenses.
IP Endpoint License required per IP telephone connected
IP Endpoint License for
LIC-CIX-IP PORT
to LIPU/S, beyond the 16 endpoint licenses bundled with
L
Strata CIX.
i
the LIC-CIX license.
cen
FeatureFlex license for
Strata CIX license to activate FeatureFlex. Requires one
ses
LIC-CIX-FF
CIX.
per CIX system to run FeatureFlex applications.
CTX670 Built-in MIS
Required to activate the built-in MIS data channel when using
LIC670-MIS IN
an MIS system with the built-in ACD features in a CTX670
License
Release 3 system.
CSTA OAI Application
One required for each CSTA application interfaced to the CIX/
LIC100-CSTA AP
License for CTX100
CTX100 system.
LIC-CIX-CSTA AP
CIX200 CSTA License
Required to activate CSTA support in a Strata CIX200 system.
CSTA OAI Application
One required for each CSTA application interfaced to the
LIC670-CSTA AP
License for CIX/CTX670
CTX670 system.
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
3-5

Licenses
Table 3-5
Type and Number of Licenses Required by Feature
IP
IP
Basic Port
Strata Net
SoftIPT
IP Port
Interface
System
Card
License1
License2
License3
License5
License4
IP ACD (MAS)
LIPU/S
Each Port
announcement ports
IP Attendant Console
LIPU/S
Each Port
IP Voice Mail (MAS)
LIPU/S
Each Port
Strata Net IP
LIPU/S
Each Trunk
1*
IPT-2008-SDL
LIPU/S
1*
Each Station
IPT-2010-SD/2020-SD S
LIPU/S
1*
Each Station
SIP Phone
LIPU/S
1*
Each Station
Each Active
SoftIPT
LIPU/S
1*
Each Station
Station
WIPT 2000
LIPU/S
1*
Each Station
IPT-1020
BIPU-M
Each Station
CIX R4.0
IPT-2010-SD/2020-SD
BIPU-M
Each Station
in R4.0 SoftIPT
BIPU-M
Each Station
Each Station
rted WIPT 2000
BIPU-M
Each Station
ppo Strata Net IP
BIPU-Q
Each Trunk
1*
ACD announcement ports
N/A
Each Port
Attendant Console
N/A
Each Console
atures su DKT/SLT Interface ports
N/A
Each Port
Trunk Interface Port
N/A
Each Port
X R2.2 feT Voice Mail ports
N/A
Each Port
C
* One license per system.
1. LIC-4 BASIC
2. LIC100 STRATA N
LIC200 STRATA N
LIC670 STRATA N
3. LIC-SOFTIPT
4. LIC-CIX
5. LIC-CIX-IP PORT
3-6
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Licenses
MAS Licensing
MAS Licensing
This option enables you to manage, issue and activate MAS licenses in the eManager server host. It is
required that administrators should be able to manage licenses for all applications in the MAS.
Access Main MAS Licensing Screen
ä Before connecting to the system login using the keyboard connected to the MAS. In the Manager
Menu, click MAS Licensing. The screen below displays.
Licen
ses
The upper part of the screen is a list of MAS License Container files stored in the eManager server in
the <eManager entry point>\Licenses folder. The example above shows a system with licensing already
activated. The first time the license fold is viewed it will be empty. The following columns are shown:
· Generation Time date and time assigned by the FYI application when it creates the container file.
· File Name specified by the administrator when the container file was created in eManager using
the Upload button.
· MAS Serial Number defined in the header of the container file.
· Local Status
· Local MAS The MAC address in this container file is the same as the local MAS host MAC
address (where the eManager server is running).
· Issued in Local MAS Same as "Local MAS" but the licenses in this container have been issued
already. eManager stores a log of the issued container files.
· Remote MAS The MAC address in this container file is different than the local MAS host
MAC address (where the eManager server is running). This file could be viewed, uploaded to
other MAS, but it cannot be issued in the local MAS host.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
3-7

Licenses
MAS Licensing
Upload Licenses
Note The Upload button is enabled if no file is selected, otherwise disabled.
The MAS License Container File is an XML file generated by the FYI application. The file can be
downloaded from FYI or the file can be mailed from FYI.
1. From the MAS Licensing screen, click Upload.
The Upload MAS License Container File screen
displays (shown right).
2. If the file is stored in the local client PC, click
Browse. Locate the .XML file (Container file) on
the local hard disk drive. Select the Container
file. The file's contents and file name are copied
into the fields of the Upload screen
...or go to FYI and open the MAS License
Container File in a text file such as Notepad.
Copy and paste the displayed file in the Content portion of the Upload MAS license screen shown here.
The File Name field is blank.
Note If you chose to fill in the File Name before you copied/pasted the file, the file name remains in the
field after pasting the file.
3. If the file name was filled in automatically, change the file name so that it is unique to the file. If you
copy/pasted the file into this screen, you need to enter a unique file name.
Note File names must conform with the Windows filenames and conventions. If the file you uploaded
does not have an .xml extension, you must add it before saving the file.
4. Click Save.
Issue Licenses
Note The file you selected must be "Local" or "Issued in local MAS" to use this feature. Any file with a
local status of Remote MAS must be issued from the controlling server.
ä From the MAS Licensing screen, select a file and click Issue Licenses. eManager parses the selected
container file, extracts each license for the different applications and services and delivers the licenses.
This process can take several minutes depending upon the number of applications installed.
A pop-up dialog box will show the status of the issue command as successful or failed.
Activate Licenses
ä To activate the licenses, click Activate Licenses. A warning box displays telling you that the MAS
operating system will be shut down and rebooted. The MAS attempts to shut down and reboot
immediately.
Important!
During the activation process, the MAS cannot be processing calls. Any current connection
being processed by the MAS is disconnected. In order not to disrupt daily activity in your
customer's business, you can choose to do the activation process unattended during the
evening/early morning hours by scheduling the procedure using the Windows scheduling
process.
Delete Licenses
Note You can delete more than one file at a time by highlighting the files.
1. From the MAS Licensing screen, highlight a Container file(s).
3-8
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Licenses
MAS Licensing
2. Click Delete. A pop-up box displays and you are asked to confirm your deletion.
3. Click OK.
View Licenses
Note The View button is enabled when
one file is highlighted, disabled
when none or more than one is
highlighted.
1. From the MAS Licensing screen,
highlight a Container file.
2. Click View. The MAS Licensing
Container File displays (sample
shown below).
View Current Licenses
1. From the MAS Licensing screen,
make sure that none of the listings in the License Container Directory is highlighted.
Licen
Note To remove a highlight, press Ctrl and click the highlighted item.
ses
2. Click View Current Licenses. eManager
checks the status of the license activation
through each application's licensing
interface and displays the results (sample
shown right).
3. When finished, click OK.
Status Values Shown on Screen
· 0 New license was issued, but not
activated yet.
· 1 The license activation during the
startup procedure was successful.
· 2 The license activation during the
startup procedure failed.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
3-9

This page is intentionally left blank.

System
4
This chapter provides Strata CIX system programming information for programmers using the Strata
eManager programming interface.
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
Prerequisite Program: None
All PCBs, except the system processors, are assigned to cabinet slots using this command. The CIX
systems have a dedicated slot in the Base cabinet for the processor PCB, they do not require this
assignment.
· The CIX100 and system provides one four-slot Base and one Expansion cabinet with four slots for a
total of eight card slots.
· The CIX200 Base Cabinet has three slots (S101~S103), the expansion cabinet has four slots
(S201~S204) for a total of seven slots.
· The CIX670 systems provide one Base Cabinet and up to six Expansion Cabinets. The Base Cabinet
has eight slots and each of the six Expansion Cabinet have 10 slots each for a total of 68 slots.
1. Fill out the Card Assignment Record Sheets.
2. From the Program Menu click Advanced > Configuration > System > Card Assignment. The Card Slot
System
Assignment screen displays (shown right).
3. Cabinet (01~07) Select the two digit cabinet number to be assigned. The cabinet and slot number
appear in the cab/slot field.
· Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CIX100).
· Select 01 or 02 for CIX200.
· Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet (CIX670).
4. Slot (01~10) Select the two digit card slot number to be assigned.
· Select 01~04 for Base Slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots (CIX100).
· Select 01~04 for CIX200 Base and Expansion slots. Slot 04 in the Base Cabinet is the LSLU card
slot.
· Select 01~08 for Base Slots and 01~10 for Expansion Slots (CIX670).
Note The CIX100 ACTU built-in relay is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, BIOU2 is
installed as default in a virtual equipment position; Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20 in Program 100.
To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in relay, use the programming telephone to
remove the virtual BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cabinet 01/Slot 01~08 in the normal
manner.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-1

System
100 Cabinet Slot PCB Assignments
5. Select the PCB Type. Use the drop down menu to select the PCB type. WinAdmin will start a refresh
cycle, watch the progress bar (lower right corner of PC screen) to verify when WinAdmin is complete.
The PCB type that was selected will appear in the PCB Type field.
6. Click Submit to save your data.
4-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
Dial Number Plan
Dial Number Plan
Prerequisite Program: None
The Dial Number Plan lets you download all current dialing numbers registered in the CIX database.
The Numbering Plan screen gives you details on the different categories of Numbers.
The table below contains the information shown on the screen.
Number Type
Description
Digit Groups
Lists all numbers that begin with each digit 0~9 separately.
DKT Prime DNs
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a digital telephone in Program 200.
SLT Prime DNs
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to a standard telephone in Program 200.
ISDN DNs
Lists all Directory Numbers assigned to ISDN telephones in Program 202.
Phantom DNs
Lists all Phantom Directory Numbers assigned to digital telephones, Add-On-Modules
and DSS consoles in Programs 205, 213, 215 respectively.
IPT_B Prime DNs
Lists all Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-M card in Program 200
IPT_L Prime DNs
Lists all IPT Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-L card in Program 200
SIP Prime DNs
Lists all SIP Prime Directory Numbers assigned to BIPU-L card in Program 200
ACD Pilot
Lists all ACD Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 540.
Hunt Group Pilot
Lists all Hunt Group Pilot Numbers assigned in Program 209.
Access Codes
Lists all feature, line and line group access codes assigned in Program 102.
System
ä Click Continue to view the next screen. You will be able to view all the DNs, IPT DNs and other
numbers used.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-3

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
102 Flexible Access Codes
Prerequisite Program: None
Strata CIX comes with pre-assigned Flexible Access Codes that the telephone dials to access features. This
enables you to create customized Flexible Access Codes. The Strata CIX Flexible Numbering Plan
associates features stored in memory (i.e., "Store Code," see Table 4-1) to a Flexible Numbering Code
assigned by the user.
Note Flexible Numbering Plan access codes cannot conflict with DN assignments.
1. Enter your customized Flexible Numbering Plan in the "Programmed Value" column of Table 4-1.
2. From the Program Menu click Advanced > Configuration > System > Flexible Numbering Plan. The
Numbering Plan Assignment screen displays.
3. 00 Flexible Numbering Plan Enter the digits to be dialed (0~9,#,*) to access a feature or an OLG. To
delete, select "No Data" in "01 Feature Name." Conflict with an assigned DN will produce an error.
4. 01 Flexible Numbering Feature Select the Flexible Numbering Feature (see Table 4-1) to see which
access code is being assigned.
Note To assign an access code to an OLG, select "Line Group access code - one access code for each
OLG." To assign the prefix digit(s) for the access code of individual lines, select "Line access code -
leading digit(s) to access individual lines". Example: If #7 is selected as the line access prefix, the
users will dial #7xxx to access an individual line (where xxx is the line number).
5. 02 OLG Number Enter the Outgoing Line Group number to which the OLG access code is being
assigned. This field is only required if you chose "Line Group Access Code one access code for each
OLG" for the Flexible Numbering Feature in Step 4 above. Enter a 0 in this field if a Feature Code other
than 551 was selected.
Note 02 OLG Number:
·
0~32 CIX100 and CIX200
·
0~128 CIX670
·
Field appears only when 01 Feature Name Line Group Access Code one access code for
each OLG is selected.
6. Click Submit.
ä To delete an access code assignment
ä Click the Create button and enter the access code in the index, select No Assignment, click Submit.
This clears the access code so that you can reassign it to another feature.
4-4
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Creating New Feature Codes
1. Click on the Create button.
2. Enter new feature/access code. Click Ok. WinAdmin will start a refresh cycle, when your complete
screen will change to a gray (edit mode) color and the feature/access code will be red.
3. From the Feature Name drop down menu select the feature to be assigned.
4. Submit your data.
Notes
· To range program feature/access codes use a "-" between a range of values and a "," for an additional
entry not in a range.
· System Date and Time Access Codes The system date adjust code and system time adjust code is
different for every system. The defaults are #651 and #652 respectively.
Important!
If you backup a CIX database (default.dat) with software that does not support Time/Date
access codes and then restore it to a CIX software version that supports these access codes,
you must use this program to set the Time/Date access codes. This must be done to allow end
users to set the Time/Date from their LCD digital telephones.
Flexible Numbering Default Settings
Table 4-1 shows the default Flexible Numbering Feature and Flexible Numbering Plan code relationships.
Pressing the Flexible Numbering Plan code from any station enables users to directly access the Flexible
Numbering Feature. The Feature Index Codes will display on the LCD of the telephone once the Default
Access Codes are entered.
Note These three-digit Feature Index Numbers should not be confused with the Program 205 three-digit
Button Codes.
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings
System
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
No Data
ABR - Activate
150
#441
ABR - Cancel
151
#442
Call Park Orbits - Activate
170
#33
Call Park Orbits - Park Answer (Retrieve Parked Call)
173
#32
System Orbit Number
174
7000~7019
DND - Local Activation
180
#6091
DND - Local Cancellation
181
#6092
DND - Remote Activation
182
#6191
DND - Remote Cancellation
183
#6192
Door Lock Control -Unlock
190
#12
Door Phones - Call
191
#15
Flash - short
200
#450
Flash - long
210
#451
Group Paging - Invoke All Group Paging
220
#30
Group Paging - Invoke Individual Group Paging
230
#31
Answer for External Group Paging
232
#5#36
Emergency Page - Invoke All Emergency Paging
240
#37
Emergency Page - Invoke Individual Emergency Paging
250
#38
Originate Call by Terminal Speed Dial (Index: 00-99)
260
*1
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-5

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 000-099)
261
*2
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 100-199)
262
*3
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 200-299)
263
*4
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 300-399)
264
*5
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 400-499)
265
*6
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 500-599)
266
*7
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 600-699)
267
*8
Originate Call by System Speed Dial (Index: 700-799)
268
*9
Register Speed Dial
269
#66
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Activation
340
#6011
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Activation
341
#6021
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Activation
342
#6031
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Activation
343
#6041
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Activation
350
#6013
Call Forward CF-B; External Call) - Activation
351
#6023
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Activation
352
#6033
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Activation
353
#6043
Call Forward (CF-A; Any Call) - Remote Activation
360
#6012
Call Forward (CF-B; Any Call) - Remote Activation
361
#6022
Call Forward (CF-NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
362
#6032
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; Any Call) - Remote Activation
363
#6042
Call Forward (CF-A; External Call) - Remote Activation
370
#6014
Call Forward (CF-B; External Call) - Remote Activation
371
#6024
Call Forward (CF-NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
372
#6034
Call Forward (CF-B/NA; External Call) - Remote Activation
373
#6044
Call Forward (Any Call) - Cancellation
380
#6051
Call Forward (External Call) - Cancellation
390
#6053
Call Forward (Any Call) - Remote Cancellation
400
#6052
Call Forward (External Call) - Remote Cancellation
410
#6054
Change Password for Remote Activation/Cancellation
420
#670
Input Account Code
530
#46
Change DISA Security Code
540
#658
Outgoing Call by Directing Individual Trunk
550
#7
Outgoing Call by Directing Outgoing Line Group
551
None
Three Way Conferencing (Override to Tandem Connection)
560
#494
Enter User Programming Mode
570
#9876
LCR -Outgoing Call
580
9
Set Voice Mail Message Waiting (activate MW without ringing for VM)
591
#63
Release Received Message Waiting
592
#409
Release Sent Message Waiting (Cancel MW without ringing for VM))
593
#64
MW Answer access code (Retrieve Received Message Waiting)
594
#408
Cancel ACB
600
#431
Start BGM
610
#490
Stop BGM
611
#491
Start BGM for External Paging Device
612
#492
Stop BGM for External Paging Device
613
#493
4-6
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
102 Flexible Access Codes
Table 4-1
Flexible Numbering Plan Default Settings (continued)
Feature
Default
Programmed
Flexible Numbering Feature
Index
Access Code
Value
Built-in modem
630
#19
Night Ring Answer
640
#5#39
Travelling Class Override Code Input Number
650
#471
Change Travelling Class Override Code
651
#69
Activate System Call Forward
670
#620
Cancel System Call Forward
671
#621
Call Pickup -Directed DN Pickup of Ringing or Held DN calls and Call Park
678
#5#29
Answer
Call Pickup1 - Directed DN pickup for either Ringing or Held Calls (Release
679
#5#6
2.0, MF017 or higher)
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Group Pickup
680
#5#34
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Terminal
681
#5#5
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed Group
682
#5#32
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Directed DN
683
#5#22
Call Pickup for Incoming Call -Any External Call
684
#5#9
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed CO Retrieve
685
#5#73
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Local Retrieve
686
#5#71
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Remote Retrieve
687
#5#72
Call Pickup for On-Hold Call -Directed DN Retrieve
688
#5#74
Transfer to Voice Mail
690
#407
Repeat Last Number Dialed
700
*0
Volume Control for BEEP
710
#6101
Change LCD Display Language
720
#495
Advisory Message - Activation
730
#411
Advisory Message - Cancellation
731
#412
Emergency Call
740
#911
System
Attendant Console Group Access Code
750
0
Operator Call Special Dial (for Tenant Service)
751
Private Network Access Code
760
8
Node ID (Coordinated Directory Number Prefix)
770
None
Substitution of Dial *
780
441
Substitution of Dial #
781
440
Originate Call with Sub Address -Outgoing Call/Internal Call
782
##
Application starting access code
800
#18
Split (Conference)
860
860
Voice Mail Call Monitor Off
870
#963
UCD Agent Log in (Local Activation)
890
#6061
UCD Agent Log out (Local Activation)
891
#6062
UCD Agent Log in (Remote Activation)
892
#6161
UCD Agent Log out (Remote Activation)
893
#6162
System Date Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)
910
#651
System Time Adjust Code (Release 1.02, MA227 or higher)
911
#652
1. Feature key is not provided for this Call Pickup. If you want a feature key, please use Single Touch Button that has
a feature access code for this call pickup.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-7

System
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
117 Public Dial Plan Digit Analysis
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to prevent users from circumventing Destination Restriction (DR) by sending tones
directly to the PSTN before DR analysis is complete. It defines the number of digits expected in PSTN
numbers beginning with identified sequences.
For example, a number starting with the toll prefix "1" would be expected to be 11 digits long. Calls will
be cut through to the public network only after the expected number of digits have been received.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > Public Numbering Plan. The Public
numbering Plan Analyzed Digit Number Assignment screen displays.
2. Enter the Prefix Number used for external calls.
3. Select Digits to Follow. Total digits beginning with the selected Prefix digit.
4. Get Default sets all values to factory default.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Prefix Number
Enter the initial, identifying external digits. 1 to 7 digits may include wild cards "X"
and "N".
Possible values: 1~7 (N = 2~9 and X = 0~9) (default = no value)
01 Digits to Follow
Select the number of digits to follow the prefix number established above. It is
the total number of digits in a number beginning with the Prefix Number above.
Possible values: 0~64 (default = 0)
4-8
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
103 Class of Service
103 Class of Service
Prerequisite Program: None
Class of Service (1~32) assignments are made for user's of telephones, attendant consoles, and incoming
calls based upon the line the call arrives or in some cases on a call-by-call basis when using DISA or Tie
Line with Q-Sig interfaces. For telephone users, the class of service assignments are made for each of the
Day/Night Modes to allow different services during different parts of the day.
1. Enter your COS assignments in the COS Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > Class of Service The Class of
Service Assignment screen displays (shown right).
3. COS Number Select the COS Number (1~32).
4. Place a check mark in each of the services you wish to allow.
5. Get Default sets all values to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Auto Busy Redial
Allow Automatic Busy Redial after dialing a busy outside destination.
02 Call Forward Override
Allow Call Forward Override. If allowed, this station does not forward
calls from a calling station with System or Station Call Forward activated.
This includes when dialing from the dial pad or DSS button located on
the telephone or DSS console.
03 Call Transfer w/ Camp-on
Allows a call transferred by a station to Camp-on to a busy destination.
04 Change DISA Codes
Allow stations to change the DISA Security Code.
05 DND Override - Calling Party
Permits a caller to override the DND status of a station.
System
06 DND Override - Called Party
Allows calling parties with DND Override privileges to override DND
status.
07 Do Not Disturb
Allows user to place stations on DND mode.
08 Remote Set DND/CFWD
Provides stations with the ability to set/reset DND and Call Forwarding
on other phones.
09 Executive Override
Allow Executive Override on a call.
10 Executive Override Allowed
Allow Executive Override for incoming callers.
11 Offhook Camp-on
Allow Off-hook Camp-on when encountering a busy destination.
12 Group Pickup
Allow stations for Group Call Pickup within one's own group.
13 Directed Station Pickup
Allow stations to pick another specific ringing station.
14 Directed Group Call Pickup
Allow stations to pick up a ringing station in a specified group.
15 Directed DN Call Pickup
Allow stations to pick up a specified DN.
16 Ext Call Pickup
Allow stations to pick up any incoming trunk call.
17 Directed CO Call Pickup
Allow stations to pick up a specific incoming trunk call.
18 Remote Retrieve Call Pickup
Allow stations to retrieve any call placed on Hold at a designated
terminal (PDN).
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-9

System
103 Class of Service
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
19 DN Retrieve Call Pickup
Allow stations to retrieve a held call on another DN.
20 Handsfree Override
Allow stations to override Hands Free Answerback with Ringing mode.
21 Privacy Override
Allow user to override a private call when accessing a trunk that is in
use.
22 Executive Privacy Override
Allows other stations to use Executive/Privacy Override on this station's
calls.
23 Invoke Emergency Page
Allow the Emergency Page feature.
Note
Not used in Release 1.
24 Join Feature
Allow the Join feature (Attendant Feature).
25 Through Dialing
Allow to perform Through Dialing (Attendant Feature). Attendant can
connect an inbound trunk call to another trunk with permission to use
DTMF.
26 Tandem CO Connection
Allow user to set up a Trunk-to-Trunk connection and exit the
conversation.
Note
This is required for a tandem between two stations in different
nodes.
27 Day/Night Control
Allow Day/Night Mode changing privilege.
28 Ext BGM Control
Allow BGM over external speakers to be turned on/off.
29 LCR Feature
Allow access to LCR.
30 Individual Trunk Access
Allows user to dial individual trunk access codes, or use direct line
appearances, to access specific lines.
31 Trunk Access Allowed
Allow Access trunk groups by trunk access codes.
32 Forced Account Codes
Must use Forced Account Codes for placing external calls.
33 Verified Account Codes
Verify Account Codes before an external call is placed.
34 Allow Short Hook Flash
Allow a Short Flash signal over outside lines.
35 Allow Long Hook Flash
Allow a Long Flash signal over outside lines.
36 Allow Hook Flash
Receive hook flash over CO Lines, and enable telephones and voice
mail ports to perform hook flashes.
37 Automatic Line Hold
Automatically holds an active call when accessing another line.
38 Can Receive OCA
Allow others to call this station using Off-hook Call Announce.
39 LCR on Direct Trunk Access
Sets whether LCR should be used if trunk is accessed directly -
Available in R2
40 Disconnect Outgoing Call
If this parameter is allowed any O/G calls made by Extensions with this
COS will be automatically released after a defined time period. Time
period defined in Program 104.
41 BGM Enable
Allow Background Music from stations with this COS.
4-10
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
103 Class of Service
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
42 DSS Override Call Fwd
Enable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key, the
called station will NOT call forward if Call Forward is set. When calling
stations using the dial pad the called station's Call Forward will occur.
Disable: When this station calls another station using a DSS key, the
called station will call forward if Call Forward is set. When calling
stations using the dial pad the called station's Call Forward will occur.
43 DNIS LCD Preference
Allows the telephone to display either the DNIS Name or ANI Name on
incoming PRI calls when both are delivered on PRI.
Enable: DNIS Name displays.
Disable: ANI Name displays.
44 Auto Page Disconnect
This feature is used for preventing Page busy-out if station users forget
to hang up after making a Page call.
Enable: Stations having this COS enabled will automatically disconnect
from an external Page call after a determined time if the station does not
hang up after connecting to the Page call. The time the auto disconnect
will occur is determined by the Page disconnection timer in Program
104-25.
Disable: Stations having this COS disabled will not disconnect from a
Page call until the station is hung up.
45 UCD Local Log-in
Allows this telephone to login to a UCD group locally.
Possible values: Enable (default) - allows local login to UCD group
Disable - does not all local login
46 UCD Remote Log-in
Allows one telephone to login another telephone to a UCD group
remotely.
Possible values: Enable - Allow remote login
Disable (default) - Remote login nnot allowed
System
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-11

System
104 System Timer
104 System Timer
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the system timers. System timers set a variety of times to control calls and features
for the Strata CIX.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > System Timer. System Timer
Assignment screen displays (shown right).
2. Select the desired timer value for each of the 24 fields.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 ACB Callback Timer
The Automatic Callback timer sets the time that Automatic Callback will wait for Ring
Back Tone being cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 sec. (default = 30)
02 ACB Cancel Recall
Select the ACB overall timer value. This value establishes a time limit for the
Timer
destination telephone number to become available. Once the timer expires, the
callback will be cancelled.
Possible values: 5~180 min. (default = 30)
03 Park Recall Timer
Select the Park timer value. This sets the length of time a call can remain in Park.
Possible values: 10~600 sec. (default = 120)
04 Camp-on Timer
Select Camp-on timer value. This sets the time needed to remain off-hook prior to
Camp-on being automatically activated.
Possible values: 5~15 sec. (default = 10)
05 SMDR Valid Call Timer
The length of time that a call should be active before being captured by SMDR. The
SMDR Answer timer sets a default time for when an outgoing call will be considered
to be answered for SMDR reporting when a true answer signal is not returned from
the public network. Setting the too time short will include calls that may not be
completed, setting the time too long may exclude short calls that are answered and
terminated in a short time.
Possible values: 0~180 sec. (default = 10)
06 Tandem Timer #1
Select timer for a Trunk-to-trunk connection for which neither CO Line has release
supervision, a timer is needed to release the call if no user monitoring has taken place.
Possible values: 0~3600 sec. (default = 300)
07 Tandem Timer #2
Provides the time to enable an external user to dial a digit to extend the disconnect
time when the connection is unsupervised. This feature is used primarily with DISA.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
08 Call Forward No Ans
The System Call Forward No Answer timer specifies the time period that a phone will
Time
ring prior to invoking the Call Forward operation.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 30)
4-12
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
104 System Timer
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
09 Dial Input Timer
Permits dialed input for a telephone and trunk using DTMF.
Possible values: 0~60 sec. (default = 20)
10 Delay 1 Ringing Timer
Specifies the time to wait before applying ringing to the phones designated to ring on
Delay 1.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)
11 Delay 2 Ringing Timer
Selects the time to wait before applying ringing to the phones designated to ring on
Delay 2.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)
12 Door Unlock Timer
Select the length of time to send an electrical signal to a door for releasing the lock.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 6)
13 9+11 Judgement Timer
The 9+11 Inter-digital timer provides a timing value for the system to wait for
additional digits to be dialed looking for the 911 or 9+911 dialed codes for treatment
using the E911 procedures rather than normal dialing treatment.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)
14 Emergency Call Timer
Sets a time for advancing the call to the next station in a list of destinations for the
call.
Possible values: 10~180 sec. (default = 30)
15 ABR Busy Detection
The Destination Busy Detection timer sets the time to wait while looking for a busy
Time
condition on an external call. If detected, it will trigger the initiation of the Automatic
Busy Redial cycle.
Possible values: 1~30 sec. (default = 5)
16 Lost Call Timer
The Lost Call timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
originating station prior to attempting to recall a secondary location.
System
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 180)
17 Lost Call Final Timer
The Lost Call Final timer sets the time that a failed transfer recall will ring on the
secondary location before being automatically disconnected.
Possible values: 1~600 sec. (default = 30)
18 DTMF Tone Sending
The DTMF tone sending duration for dialing on CO Lines.
Time
Possible values: 80msec (default) or 160msec
19 Auto Disconnect
Time after which an unsupervised trunk will be automatically released.
Possible values: 0~60 min. (default = 0)
20 Tie Line Delay Timer
This timer inserts a pause before any dialled information is sent to a Tie Line, this
pause allows the distant end time to prepare for the receipt of dialled digits.
21 Answer timer before
If an incoming DISA call routes over a Tie Line and the call is not answered by the
disconnect
distant end within a certain period of time the DISA caller will be cut off. The time
period before cut off is determined by this setting.
22 Outgoing Call Talking
If PGM 103 FB40 is set to enable then after this timer expires the out going call is cut
Disconnect Timer
off
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-13

System
104 System Timer
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
23 System Timer Network
Select Network DSS Refresh Timer. The time interval when all Network DSS
DSS Refresh Timer
settings are refreshed system wide.
Note
DSS button LEDs change state immediately when the status of the DSS
button changes - regardless of this timer value.
Possible values: 20~180 seconds (default = 30)
24 Outgoing Number
This timer sets how long dialed numbers will display on telephone LCDs for outgoing
Display Timer
line calls.
Possible values: 1~120 seconds (default = 10)
25 Page Auto Disconnect
Automatically disconnects the station from a Page call if the station does not hang-
Timer
up when this timer expires. (1~240 seconds in one second intervals)
Default=10 seconds
The station must be enbaled for this feature in Prg 103-44 for this timer to appled to
the Page call
26 Caller ID Display Timer
This timer determines how long Caller ID information displays on telephone LCDs
after a call is answered. (1~300 seconds in one second intervals)
Default=15 second
4-14
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
105 System Data
105 System Data
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns system settings for your Strata CIX.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > System Data. The System Data
Assignment screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter System Parameter data using the table below.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Executive Override
Enable break in warning tone for Executive Override.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
02 Station MOH
Music On Hold selection for Private Lines, Tie Lines and Stations.
Refer to PRG109 for equipment MOH assignments.
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External 1 ~ 15, Internal (default)
03 Ring Transfer Tone
Determines whether a call hears RBT or MOH while being transferred and prior to
the destination party answering.
Possible values: RBT (default) or MOH
04 Transfer Privacy
Transfer Privacy enabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will only
flash and ring on the transferred-to telephone; the same CO line button on other
telephones will be red-busy.
Transfer Privacy Disabled: CO line buttons that have multiple appearances will flash
and ring on all telephones that have the CO line button appearance.
System
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
05 Privacy Override
Enables warning tone to members of a call prior to that call's being subject to
Privacy Override or Attendant Monitor.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
06 Credit Card Code
Enter Service Indentifier for Credit Card Calling. If no value is entered in this field
any previously programmed data is lost.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
07 Credit Card Digits
Minimum Dial Digits required for Credit Card Calling. This should be the quantity of
digits in a credit card number. If this quantity of digits is not dialed when making
credit card calls, the caller will be disconnected. This is to insure that the call is
charged to a credit card. DRL tables in Program 111 and OLGs in Program 306 must
be enabled with credit card calling for this feature to be active. Users must be
assigned to a DRL table enable with credit card calling and call out on a credit card
calling enabled OLG for this featured to be applied to the call.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 21)
08 E911 Service
Enable E911 Service availability.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
09 DR Override by SSD
Enable DR Override by System Speed Dial.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-15

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
10 Auto Station Release
Enable Automatic Station Release when the other party disconnects the station is
automaticaly set idle.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 ISDN SPID
Enable Auto Service Profile Identifier (SPID).
Possible values: Operable or Not Operable (default)
12 Night Mode Relay
Assign BIOU Relay as the Night Relay. This relay activates when the system is in
the Night Mode.
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4; BIUO2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note
CIX100 (ACTU) and CIX200 (LCTU): The built-in relay is programmed as
relay 5. For this operation, in Program 100 the BIOU2 must be installed in
Cabinet 2, Slot 5, PCB code 20.
13 BGM External Paging
Set the External Page Group Number that includes the external paging zones to
which BGM will be sent. See Program 503
Possible values: 0~4 (CIX100 and CIX200)
0~16 (CIX670)
(default = 0)
14 Lost Call Destination
Enter Lost Call Destination. Any vallid DN such as PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN.
Possible values: Any DN (Up to 5 digits) (default = no value)
15 COS Override Code
Class of Service Override Code Digits (1-8 digits). The digit length of COS override
codes. COS override codes are set in Program 510.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
16 Multi-Conference
Enable Multi-Conference capabilities for Analog Internal Calls and Outgoing Calls.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
17 Calling Number Display
Enable Calling Number Display. If a soft key display competes with a Caller ID, the
Caller ID displays, if enabled. Otherwise, the soft key function will continue to be
displayed.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
18 Night Bell Relay
Assign BIOU Relay (1~8) as the Night Relay - this relay activates when the
system is in the Night Mode.
BIOU1 provides relays 1 to 4.
BIOU2 provides relays 5 to 8
Note Note: The CIX100 ACTU and CIX200 LCTU built-in relay
is programmed as relay 5. For this relay operation, a virtual
BIOU2 is installed, as default, in a virtual equipment position
- Cabinet 2 slot 5. (Cab. 02 slot 05, PCB code 20, in prog.
100)
To install an actual BIOU2 and disable the ACTU built-in
relay, use the programming telephone to remove the virtual
BIOU2 and then install the actual BIOU2 in Cab. 01/slot
01~08 in the normal manner.
4-16
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
19 Display Preference
Select whether to display DNIS or Caller ID.
Possible values: DNIS (default) or Caller ID
20 Transit Counter
Select the Networking Transit Counter. This device limits the number of nodes
through which a Strata Net call can pass before being terminated as a lost call.
Possible values: 0~128 (default = 1)
21 Primary Clock
Enter data as xxyyzz. (xx = cabinet, yy = slot, zz = channel)
22 Secondary Clock
zz=channel 01 if clock source is RPTU or RDTU
zz=channel 01, 02, 03, or 04 if clock source is RBUU/RBUS or RBSU
Example: If the Primary Clock Source should be a assigned to an RPTU in cabinet
5, slot 2, enter 050201.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100 and CIX200: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 for Expansion cabinets.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01~03 for Base slots and 01~04 for Expansion slots.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
23 Call History Prefix 1
Add the dialing prefix 1 when using the callback feature in Call History.
Possible values: Add (default) or Do Not Add
24 Emergency Digits Sent
Enter an alternative emergency dialing string. If no value is entered in this field any
previously programmed value is overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = "911")
System
25 DP Make Ratio
Select the Dial Pulse Make/Break ratio.
Possible values: 33% (default) or 40%
26 Call Button Jumping
Select whether to execute Jumping LED.
If enabled, line calls move from a telephone DN button to a line button after they are
answered. After the call is answered, the DN button is cleared to receive another
call. With this operation the DN acts as an answer button for the telephone. This
operation only applies if the line that is answered has a CO, GCO, or Pooled line
button appearance on the telephone. If disabled, line calls remain on the DN after
they are answered.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
27 Set Domestic Code
Set to 0 (zero) to enable CIX to insert the leading zero when receiving a National
CLI.
29 CPN Numbering Plan
Called Party Number numbering plan format.
Possible values: Unknown (default) or ISDN
30 SLT Recall Timer
Hooking = 100ms, On-Off Hook = 500ms
31 Analog Trunk Hunting
This parameter defines the order in which analog trunks are selected during the
outgoing call trunk selection process.
Possible values: Terminal (default) or Cyclical
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-17

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
32 Display Check Sum
Enable a System Checksum error to be displayed and an error log to be created.
Error
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
33 Analog Tie Line
Analog Tie Line Disconnect Timer enables tandem analog Tie Lines to automatically
Disconnect Timer
disconnect if the timer expires.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
34 Analog DID Method
Analog DID method: Normal (DTMF)/MFC-R2 3 digits/MFC-R2 4 digits
Possible values: Normal (default), MFC-R2 3, MFC-R2 4
35 ALaw/MuLaw
Choose the companding technique appropriate to the local PSTN. Mu Law in North
America.
Possible values: A Law or Mu Law (default)
39 Std. Tel. Ringing
Select the Ringing Cadence for Standard Telephone circuits.
Cadence
Note
This does not apply to Digital to IP telephones.
Ringing Type 1
External Ring: 20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:
20Hz, 0.4sec.ON - 0.2sec. OFF
0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:
20Hz, 1sec. ON - 1sec. OFF
Ringing Type 2
Ringing Type2 is the same Ringing Cadence as DK.
External Ring: 20Hz, 0.4sec. ON - 0.2sec. OFF
0.4sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
Internal Ring:
20Hz, 1sec.ON - 3sec. OFF
Recall:
20Hz, 1sec. ON - 3sec. OFF
40 Sys CF Cascade
Enable: A call that forwards to a device that is also System Call forwarded, will be
sent to the device's System Call Forward destination.
Note
Note: If enabled, the SCF alternate destination set in Prog 500-05 will be
ignored.
Disable: A call that forwards to a device that is System Call Forwarded, will not
follow the device's System Call Forward.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
41 CSTA B-Ch. Operation
Enabled - CSTA shall provide full 'B' Channel path information. Disabled - CSTA
shall provide channel group only.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
42 ISDN Complete IE
Whether to append Sending Complete IE into SETUP message and INFO message
Option
in ISDN.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
43 Repeat Last No. Dialed
Enable - store dialed numbers that are not complete in the last number dialed buffer.
Disable - only store complete telephone numbers in the last number dialed buffer.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
44 Default Calling Number
Enabled - the system will send the default Calling Number to the PSTN when
stations make ISDN calls in the local node.
Disable -the system will not send the default Calling number to the PSTN on ISDN
calls in the local node.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
4-18
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
105 System Data
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
45 DSS Ringing Indication
Select whether DSS LEDs should flash red or not light when their respective
Directory Numbers are ringing.
Ringing - DSS LEDs flash red when their respective Directory Numbers are ringing.
Idle - DSS LEDS are idle (not lit) when their respective Directory Numbers are
ringing.
Possible values: Ringing (default) or Idle
46 Caller ID for Forward,
Enable this feature if CO line Caller ID should display on the LCD of a station that
Transfer or Recall
receives a Forwarded,Transferred or Recall call.
Disable this feature if the originating Station Name\PDN should display on the LCD
of a station that receives a Forwarded,Transferred or Recall call.
Possible values: Enable (Default) or Disable
System
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-19

System
System Call Forward
System Call Forward
Program Number(s): Program Number(s):500 and 504
Set up System Call Forward (SCF) parameters using the following programs.
1. Complete the System Call Forward Record Sheets.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > System > System Call Forward. The System
Call Forward Destination screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 500 data.
4. Enter Program 504 data.
5. Click Submit.
500 / 504 System Call Forward Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure up to 32 system call forward patterns. Station DNs are assigned to
these patterns in the station COS assignments.
Note The Administrator programs the condition of transfer by setting Call Type, Period and Telephone
Status. Destinations 1 and 2 should be programmed after transfer conditions are set.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 SCF Template
Select the SCF pattern number to configure.
Possible values: 1~4 (CIX100), 1~10 (CIX200 & CIX670 Base),
1~32 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Call Type
Select the type of call that should forward in this pattern.
Possible values: CO Loop or Grd, DID, Tie, Ring Transfer and Internal
(default = no value)
02 Period
Select the system time period in which this SCF pattern should operate.
Possible values: Day, Day2 or Night (default = Day)
03 Telephone Status
Select the telephone DN status that should cause this SCF pattern to operate.
Possible values: No Forwarding, Busy, No Answer, Busy No Answer or DND
(default = No Forwarding)
04 Destination 1
Enter the first destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
05 Destination 2
Enter an alternate destination to which the call should forward.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
4-20
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
System Call Forward
System Call Forward Copy
The copy function enables you to selectively copy SCF destinations to any or all SCF segments and any or
all SCF templates. It combines Program 500 and Program 504 on the same screen.
1. Select Advanced Configuration > System > System Call Forward > a SCF template (1-32) and then a
Telephone Status (example "Busy No Answer"). The System Call Forward screen displays (shown
above) showing the status of the first available call forwarding system.
2. Select the needed values from the drop-down menus for the System Call Forward and Telephone Status
fields. These fields are required. As soon as the second field is selected, the full page displays for
editing.
Note If it is not yet configured, the Telephone Status field indicates No Forwarding.
3. Select Call Type and Period by highlighting the desired line in the display.
4. Type the needed information into the Destination 1 and 2 fields. Destination 1 is always required,
Destination 2 is optional.
5. Click Submit to send the data to the CIX.
6. Click Submit to send the destination assignments to the CIX
... or click Copy to display the Copy dialog box. You can click on Copy at any time to copy
Destinations to any SCF template, Call type and period, including all SCF segments and templates.
System
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-21

System
System Call Forward Table View
Copy Dialog Box
ä To copy SCF Destinations to any selected SCF assignment click Copy on the System Call Forward
screen. The System Call Forward Range Copy screen displays (shown right).
ä To select the Destination(s) that should be copied
1. You can remove a destination entry by removing the checkmark from it.
2. Select the appropriate Period, Call type, Status and SCF assignments to which the destination(s) should
be copied.
3. Click Copy Now. Your entries are submitted to the CIX and the destination(s) are copied to all
assignments that you selected.
Possible Errors
· If you attempt to remove Destination1 (only) when there is a Destination2 assigned.
· If you attempt to assign Destination2 when Destination1 is not assigned.
Notes
· If you check "Prompt on Error," the copy function stops if one of the above errors occurs, then you are
given a choice to continue or abort. Continue skips the error and does not perform the copy.
· If you do not check "Prompt on Error," all errors, if any, are skipped and the copy is not executed.
· You can assign or remove both destinations at the same time without causing an error.
System Call Forward Table View
SCF Table View shows the entire set up of all available system call forward levels.
ä To access the SCF Table View
ä Select Advanced Configuration > System > SCF Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-23 for table functionality.
4-22
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
501 System Speed Dial
501 System Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: None
System Speed Dial consists of up to 800 pre-programmed numbers each containing up to 32 digits. If the
number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will automatically be appended to
create longer numbers. One other speed dial location can be nested within the number for dialing a
common routine with the number (see "516 Station Speed Dial" on page 5-40 for more information about
nesting).
1. Complete the System Speed Dial Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > System > System Speed Dial. The System
Speed Dial screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 501 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Speed Dial Bin
Enter the speed dial bin location.
Possible values: 000~799 (default = no value)
01 Number
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 1~9 (seconds), which is the length of
the pause.
02 Name
This is the Name that appears on Telephone LCD dial directories.
System
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
System Speed Dial Table View
System Speed Dial Table View shows the entire set up for all speed dial numbers.
ä To access the System Speed Dial Table View
ä Select Advanced Configuration > System > System Spdial Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-23 for table functionality.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-23

System
Day Night Service
Day Night Service
Program Number(s): Program Number(s):112, 106 and 113
Note Refer to Automatic Day Light Savings Time Change, Program Number "121 Automatic Day Light
Savings Time Change" on page 10-4.
The programs that follow are used to set up Day and Night modes in Strata CIX.
1. Complete the Day/Night Mode Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > Day Night Services. The Day
Night Mode Assignment screen displays.
3. Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. Possible values: 1~8
(default = no value)
4. Enter the Calendar Day (YYYYMMDD) to assign a Working Day Type schedule
... or click on one of the following buttons.
· List View a summary list of programmed Calendar days.
· Copy Copies the currently viewed record to another record(s).
· Get Default - Restores factory default data.
5. Enter remaining Program 112 data.
6. Enter Program 106 data.
7. Enter Program 113 data.
8. Click Submit.
112 Day/Night Mode Calendar
Prerequisite Program: 106 on page 4-25
This program enables you to assign Working Day Types for up to 128 unique Calendar Days. These
settings override the default system schedules in Strata CIX to enable Day/Night scheduling for unique
circumstances.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Calendar Day
Enter the Calendar Day for which to assign a Working Day Type schedule.
Possible values: YYYY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Day (default = no value)
01 Working Day Type
Select the Working Day Type.
Possible values: Delete, Work Day, Non-Work Day or Holiday, (default= no
value)
4-24
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
Day Night Service
106 Day/Night Mode "Type of Day" Mapping Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 113 on page 4-26
The Day of the Week schedule defines each day as the type of day the schedule shall follow. These types of
days are called Work Day, Non-work Day, and Holiday. Each day of the week can be classified.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Monday
Assign the type of day schedule that is to be used for each day of the week.
Possible values: Work Day, Non-work Day (default) or Holiday
02 Tuesday
03 Wednesday
04 Thursday
05 Friday
06 Saturday
07 Sunday
System
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-25

System
Day Night Service
113 Day/Night Mode Schedule per Tenant Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
The Day/Night Mode daily schedule defines the times for the start of the Work Day, Non-work Day, and
Holiday for each of the modes (Day, Day2. Night) per Tenant. Each "type of day" defined in "106 Day/
Night Mode "Type of Day" Mapping Table Assignment" on page 4-25 requires an assigned schedule.
Complete Day/Night Mode Record Sheet.
Note The start time for Day 1 mode equals the end time for Night mode.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the daily schedules will be configured. (This
feature is available with R2.2 or higher).
Possible values:1~8.
Work Day
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start time for Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
· 01 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
· 02 Day2 Mode
Note
9999 deletes or skip modes.
· 03 Night Mode
Non-Work Day
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Non-Work Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
· 04 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
· 05 Day2 Mode
Note
Enter 9999 deletes or skip modes.
· 06 Night Mode
Holiday
Enter the Day1, Day2 and Night Mode start times for Holiday Day day type.
Possible values: hhmm; hh = hour (00~23, 99), mm = minutes (00~59, 99)
· 07 Day 1 Mode
(default = 9999)
· 08 Day2 Mode
Note
9999 deletes or skip modes.
· 09 Night Mode
4-26
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
PAD Table
PAD Table
Program Number(s): Program Number(s):107, 108 and 114
Assign PAD groups, PAD tables and PAD conference tables using these programs.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > PAD Table. The PAD Table
Assignment screen displays.
2. Enter Program 107 data.
3. Enter Program 108 data.
4. Enter Program 114 data.
5. Click Submit.
Note Clicking *Note displays Table 4-2 for Program 107 and Table 4-3 for Program 108.
107 PAD Table Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns additional Sender and Receiver PAD values to PAD groups in the PAD table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Sender PAD Device
Enter Sender PAD device or group. See Table 4-2 or use drop-down menu.
Number
Possible values: Analog telephone, DKT, Analog trunk, T1 trunk, ISDN station, ISDN
trunk, CONF bridge, Music source, EXT. pagong, IPT-B, IPT-L/SIP,
PAD group 1~10. (default = no value.)
CIX100 - 6 PAD group numbers
System
CIX200, CIX670 Basic - 10 PAD group numbers
CIX670 Expanded - 32 PAD group numbers
02 Receiver PAD Device
Enter Receiver PAD device or group number. See Table 4-2 or use drop-down menu.
Number
Possible values: Same as above
CIX100 - 6 PAD group numbers
CIX200, CIX670 - 10 PAD group numbers
CIX670 Expanded - 32 PAD group numbers)
03 PAD Loss
Enter PAD Value (see Table 4-2 or use the drop-down menu). The value shown
represents the net effect.
Note
To PAD is to insert loss; therefore, "negative loss" equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain
More volume
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Loss
8 = 15dB Net Loss
Less volume
(default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-27

System
PAD Table
Program 107 PAD Table Example
If the Sender is an analog telephone (PAD device number 1) and the receiver is a T1 trunk (PAD device
number 4), then the PAD value is 6. (6 = 9dB Net Loss).
PAD group numbers are assigned in Program 108 PAD Group Assignment.
Table 4-2
Program 107 PAD Table
PAD Device or Group Number of Receiver (Listener)
e
on
ph
n
e
le
o
k
rce
e
runk
n
..
ging
oup 1
oup 2
oup 3
oup 123
g T
nk
ru
Stati
T
Bridg
a
000
000
lo
log T
ru
F
T
1
2
AD Gr
AD Gr
AD Gr
AD Gr
Ana
DKT
Ana
T1
ISDN
ISDN
CON
Music Sou
Ext. P
IPT
IPT
P
P
P
P
PAD Device No. of
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
..
Sender (Speaker)
10
11
10
10
10
13
1
Analog Telephone
0
0
0
6
6
6
X1
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
DKT
0
0
0
6
6
6
0
-
0
3
0
0
0
0
3
Analog Trunk
0
0
6
6
6
6
X1
-
6
0
0
0
0
0
4
T1 Trunk
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
3
0
0
0
0
5
ISDN Station
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
3
0
0
0
0
6
ISDN Trunk
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
-
6
3
0
0
0
0
7
Conference Bridge
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
0
0
0
0
0
8
Music Source
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
Ext. Paging
0
0
6
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
IPT (BIPU-M)
-6
0
-6
0
0
0
-6
-
-6
0
0
0
0
0
11
IPT (LIPU)
6
3
6
6
6
6
6
-
6
0
0
0
0
0
PAD Group 12
101
6
0
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
0
0
0
0
3
(LIPU - Strata Net)
102 PAD Group 23
0
0
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
0
0
0
-6
-6
(BIPU-Q - Strata Net)
103 PAD Group 34
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
(PRI - Strata Net)
:
:
132 PAD Group 32
PAD values
1. "X" data set for PAD Conference Table Assignment.
2. For Strata Net IP (LIPU) only. Not default - Recommended values
3. For Strata Net IP (BIPU-Q) only. Not default - Recommended values
4. For PRI StrataNet only. Not default - Recommended values
* The default values for PAD Group is 0dB.
4-28
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
PAD Table
108 PAD Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
You can enter up to 32 additional device groups to the PAD table to deal with exceptions to the default
table.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 PAD Group Device Type
Enter the Device Type.
Possible values: Station, Analog trunk, T1 trunk, ISDN trunk, CONF bridge,
Music source, EXT. pagong, (default = no value.)
01 PAD Group Number
Enter the PAD Group Number.
Possible values: 0~6 (CIX100)
0~10 (CIX200)
0~32 (CIX670)
(default = 0)
Table 4-3
Program 108 PAD Group Device Type Examples
Device Type
Possible Values
Station
0~99999 (PDN)
ISDN Trunk
Channel Group No. 1~128
Analog Trunk, T1 Trunk
Trunk Number 1~264
Conference Bridge
None (Conference Bridge is only one)
Music Source
Music Port 1~15
External Paging Device
Zone Relay Number 1~8
System
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-29

System
PAD Table
114 PAD Conference Assignment
This program enables you to assign PAD values for combinations of analog trunks and telephones in
conference.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 PAD Conference Trunks
Enter the number of analog trunks using Table 4-4 below.
Possible values: 0~6 (default = 0)
02 PAD Conference
Enter the number of analog telephones. See Table 4-4 below.
Telephone
Possible values: 0~8 (default = 0)
03 PAD Conference Value
Enter the desired PAD Value for the combination of analog trunks and
telephones specified in PAD Conference Trunks and Telephones above. The
value shown shows the net effect.
Note
To pad is to insert loss; therefore, "negative loss" equals net gain.
Possible values: 1 = 6 dB Net Gain
2 = 3dB Net Gain
3 = 0dB
4 = 3dB Net Loss
5 = 6dB Net Loss
6 = 9dB Net Loss
7 = 12dB Net Los
8 = 15dB Net Loss
(default = no value).
Table 4-4
Program 114 PAD Conference Table
Number of Analog Telephones
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
6
6
log
1
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
6
s
2
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
knu
3
6
6
6
6
6
9
Tr
4
9
9
9
9
9
5
9
9
9
9
Number of Ana
6
9
9
9
4-30
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
110 Password
110 Password
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns the password. The system has two passwords levels for. Logging into the system
with the Level 1 password enables the user to administer all system programs while the level 2 password
provides restricted program administration.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > Password.
2. Enter 00 Password Level.
3. Enter 01 Password.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Password Level
Enter the digit 1 or 2 for the password as follows:
Possible values: Enter 1 to set the unrestricted administration password.
Enter 2 to set a restricted administration password.
Level 2 users can administer all programs but are restricted from
initializing the CIX and from updating the CIX software
(default = 0000 (password will not display)).
01 Password
Enter a 1~16 digit password for the selected level.
Note
Only one password can be set for each level.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII character (default = no value)
System
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-31

System
109 Music on Hold
109 Music on Hold
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns external Music on Hold (MOH) and Background Music (BGM) sources.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > Music on Hold. The External
Music on Hold Source Assignment screen displays (shown right).
2. For fields 01~07, click in the adjacent radio button to activate MOH/BGM.
3. For fields 08~15, enter the equipment location identifier and check the Connected box to activate.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
MOH/BGM #1 (BECU)
For MOH/BGM #2~#7, click in the radio button to enable MOH/BGM for the
specified BIOU. (MOH/BGM #1 enabled by default)
MOH/BGM #2 (BIOU1-J1)
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
MOH/BGM #3 (BIOU1-J2)
MOH/BGM #4 (BIOU1-J3)
MOH/BGM #5 (BIOU2-J1)
MOH/BGM #6 (BIOU2-J2)
MOH/BGM #7 (BIOU2-J3)
MOH/BGM #8 (RSTU)
Enter the RSTU equipment number to which MOH/BGM source #8 or #9~#15
are connected. Enter data as xxyyzz:
MOH/BGM #9 (RSTU)
Example: If the MOH/BGM source should be a assigned to an RSTU in cabinet
MOH/BGM #10 (RSTU)
5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter 050203.
A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a MOH
MOH/BGM #11 (RSTU)
circuit. If a PDN is assigned to the circuit that will connect to a MOH/BGM
MOH/BGM #12 (RSTU)
source, you must first delete it using PRG201
Cabinet numbers:
MOH/BGM #13 (RSTU)
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
MOH/BGM #14 (RSTU)
CIX200: Select 01 or 02
MOH/BGM #15 (RSTU)
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either shelf.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Notes
· A PDN can not be assigned to an RSTU equipment number if it is to be a
MOH circuit.
· If a PDN is assigned to an MOH/BGM circuit, you must first delete the PDN
using PRG201
4-32
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
I/O Device
I/O Device
Program Number(s): Program Number(s):803, 801 and 804
These commands assign LAN devices, RS-232C devices and device relationships for I/O Logical Devices
SMDR, SMDI, CTI and physical ports.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > I/O Device.
2. The tab sections are; I/O Logical Device (803), LAN Device (801), and RS232 Serial port (804).
803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments
This program assigns one of the following:
· SMDR and CIX Proprietary Integration to the logical device and BSIS, RS-232 port numbers.
· ACD server, CIX Proprietary Integration and Attendant Console to BECU, Network Jack logical device
and LAN port numbers. Refer to Table 4-6 on page 4-36.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Logical Device Number
Select the 3 digit logical device number for SMDR, SMDI, and LAN devices or
Network application. See Table 4-5.
Possible values: 100 = SMDR
200~206 = CTI LAN devices or PCs (default = no value) - Do not
use for My Phone Application or Feature Flex.
208 = Feature Flex (Do not use for anything else.)
300 = SMDI or CIX Proprietary Integration
400 = BLF (for CIX Attendant Console)
500 = DSS (for Telephone, DSS Console, and ADM DSS
buttons)
System
01 Device Connection
1. Select RS-232 for serial connection to SMDR or SMDI devices or PCs. These
devices are connected to BSIS, RS-232 ports.
2. Select LAN for Strata eManager, ACD Server, SMDR LAN connection, CIX
Proprietary Integration, and Attendant Console PC. These devices are connected
to the BECU Network Jack directly or via a HUB or LAN.
Possible values: None (default), LAN or RS-232
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-33

System
I/O Device
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Device Port No.
Select the Device Port numbers (one port per device).
Possible values: For a RS-232 connection: 1~4 (default = 1)
For an LAN connection: 1~9 (default = 1)
For BLF Networking: 11
For DSS Networking: 12
Notes
· SMDR and SMDI devices can be assigned to any BSIS RS-232 Port.
· LAN devices and PCs can be assigned to logical Ports 1~9 according to the
following logical device number assignments:
LAN Port1 = device 200
LAN Port2 = device 201
LAN Port3 = device 202
LAN Port4 = device 203
LAN Port5 = device 204
LAN Port6 = device205
LAN Port7 = device206
· For Network SMDR, when the Device Port is LAN, set the Client TCP Port
Number to:
6000 - SMDR Call Accounting device that supports receiving SMDR data from
multiple CIX nodes on one TCP port.
600x - SMDR Call Accounting device that does not support receiving SMDR
data from multiple CIX nodes on one TCP port. Set each CIX node to a unique
value. The MDR Call Accounting device must be capable of receiving data from
each client port simultaneously.
Table 4-5
Device Table
Physical Device
Define I/O
Logical
Logical Device
Logical
Device
Serial Number
Smart
LAN
PPP
RS-232C
Device
Media
Number
SMDR
0
-
-
OK
-
100
0
OK
-
-
-
200
1
OK
-
-
-
201
2
OK
-
-
-
202
3
OK
-
-
-
203
CTI
4
OK
-
-
-
204
5
OK
-
-
-
205
6
OK
-
-
-
206
7
OK
-
-
-
207
8
OK
-
-
-
208
0
OK
-
OK
-
300
SMDI
1
OK
-
OK
-
301
4-34
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
I/O Device
801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 803 on page 4-33.
This screen assigns Strata CIX LAN parameters, enabling PC applications to connect to the BECU
network jack.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > I/O Device. The Equipment
Assignment screen displays.
2. Click the LAN Device tab. 801 Network Jack LAN Device Assignments screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Program 801 data. Refer to Table 4-6 on page 4-36.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 LAN Port Number
Enter the port number of the LAN device to be assigned or select from the list. Refer
to "803 SMDR SMDI CTI Port Assignments" on page 4-33.
Possible values: 1~12 (default = no value)
01 Protocol
Select communication Protocol.
Possible values: TCP (default) or UDP
Note
Select UDP for Network DSS and TCP for CIX applications.
02 PC Operation Type
Select the Operation Type.
· If Server is selected, make an entery in 04 Server Port Number.
· If Client is selected, make an entery in 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: Server (default) or Client
03 Data Flow
Select the data flow protocol for CIX and PC communications.
Possible values: Synchronous or Asynchronous (default = Asynchronous)
Possible values:
System
04 Server Port Number
Enter the Server Port Number and proceed to 07 Read Retry Number. This field is
required if Server was selected in 02 PC Operation Type above. If not, leave this field
blank and proceed to 05 Client IP Address.
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
05 Client IP Address
Enter the Client LAN IP Address. This field is required if Client was selected in 02 PC
Operation Type above.
Possible values: 0~255 for each octet (default = 0)
06 Client Port Number
Enter the Client Port number
Possible values: 0~65535 (default = 0)
For Central LAN SMDR in a Strata Net use the same port number if the SMDR
Application supports receiving data from multiple nodes on one port (i.e. 6000). Use a
unique port number in each node if the SMDR Application does not support receiving
data from multiple nodes on a single port (i.e. Node 1=6000, Node 2=6001). Refer to
Figure 4-1 on Page 4-36.
07 Read Retry Counter
Set the maximum number of Read Retries.
Possible values: 0 ~ 10 (default = 1)
08 Write Retry Counter
Set the maximum number of Write Retries.
Possible values: 0 ~ 10 (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-35

System
I/O Device
Table 4-6
I/O Device Information
DSS Buttons
Program 803
SMDI LAN
SMDI LAN
BLF
Feature Flex
(DSS
SMDR SMDI CTI
CIX Proprietary
CIX Proprietary
Attendant
Console,
Port Assignments
MAS
ES/IES32
Console
DKT, & ADM
Logical Device No.
208 CTI #8
300 SMDI #0
300 SMDI #0
400 BLF
500 DSS
Device Connection
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
LAN
Device Port No
8
10
10
11
12
DSS Buttons
Program 801
SMDI LAN
SMDI LAN
BLF
Feature Flex
(DSS
LAN Device
CIX Proprietary
CIX Proprietary
Attendant
Console,
Assignments
MAS
ES/IES32
Console
DKT, & ADM
LAN Port No
8
10
10
11
12
Protocol
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
UPD
PC Operation Type
Server
Client
Client
Server
Server
Data Flow
Asynchronous
Asynchronous
Asynchronous
Asynchronous Asynchronous
Server Port No.
1117
0
0
6000
3000
Client Port No.
0
1000
5000
0
0
IP address of
IP address of MAS
Client IP
0
ES / IES32
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
192.168.254.252
192.168.254.252
Retry No.
1
1
1
1
1
Write Retry Counter
1
1
1
1
1
CIX/CTX
Strata Net
CIX/CTX
CIX/CTX
LAN
or
WAN
SMDR
Call Accounting
Figure 4-1
SMDR LAN Connection in a Strata Net
4-36
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
I/O Device
804 BSIS RS-232 Serial Port Setup
Prerequisite Program: None
Use this screen to setup the RS-232 serial ports on the BSIS PCB.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > I/O Device. The Equipment
Assignment screen displays.
2. Click the RS232 Serial Port tab. The 804 BSIS RS232 Serial Port Set Up screen will display.
3. Enter Program 804 data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 BSIS Port (1~4)
Enter the BSIS PCB port number.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
01 Port Speed
Select the data speed for the BSIS port in bits per second (bps).
Possible values: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200, 38400 or 57600
Note
The total combined maximum speed of BSIS ports cannot exceed 57,600 bps.
02 Port Parity
Select the parity error checking method used by the BSIS port.
Possible values: None, Even or Odd (default)
03 Data Bits
Select Data Length.
Possible values: 7 Bits (default) or 8 Bits
04 Flow Control
This setting indicates the type of flow control used between the BSIS port and the SMDI
or SMDR device. To enable Strata CIX to buffer call records, set this field to Flow.
Possible values: None (default) or Flow
05 Wait Timer
Select the maximum time to wait for connection. The Timer value can be one through
255 seconds. Select
System
0 to set to permanent waiting.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 30)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-37

System
115 Advisory Messages
115 Advisory Messages
Prerequisite Program: None
Specifies a set of messages that users may apply to their telephone to provide status information when
others call their station. When the user sets a message on a telephone, LCD telephones that call this
telephone will display the message. When the user sets a message, the message can be customized to
include a variable directory number, time or date as part of the message.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > Advisory Messages. The Advisory
Message Assignment screen displays.
2. Select the Message Number.
3. Enter the desired message in 01 Message.
4. Select 02 Additional Digits Type.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Message Number
Select from 5 pre-programmed messages or 5 custom messages. All messages
(0~9) can be edited; the first 5 messages have commonly used default values.
Possible values: 0~4 = pre programmed messages, 5~9 = custom messages
(default = 0)
01 Message
Defines the text portion of the LCD Advisory Message to be displayed. The total
message text, plus the user entered variables (4-digit time or date; or 1~5 digit
DN) cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 User Entered Variable
Defines the text portion of the LCD Advisory Message to be displayed.
The total message text, plus the user entered variables (4-digit time or date; or
1~5 digit DN) cannot exceed 16 characters total.
Possible values: None (default), DN, Time or Date
Table 4-7
Advisory Message Default Code Table
#
Advisory Message
Type of Additional
0
OUT TO LUNCH
None
1
IN A MEETING
None
2
CALL
Directory Number
3

BACK AT
Time
4
RETURN ON
Date
5
(No Data)
None
6
(No Data)
None
7
(No Data)
None
8
(No Data)
None
9
(No Data)
None
4-38
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

System
116 Data Initialize
116 Data Initialize
Prerequisite Program: None
This program is used to initialize the tables of selected programs in the Strata CIX system.
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > System > Data Initialize. The Data Initialize
screen displays.
2. Select a Program to initialize from the 01 Command No. dialog box.
3. Click Submit.
Table 4-8
Data Initialize Programs
Program
Program Name
Page #
Numbers
500
500 / 504 System Call Forward Assignment
4-20
520
521
522
523
524
LCR Guide Page
9-13
525
526
527
529
530
531
533
System
534
Destination Restriction Guide Page
9-10
651
531
533
534
651
651 Private Routing Plan Analysis
9-33
653
653 Private Route Choice Table Assignment
9-34
654
654 Private Route Definition Table Assignment
9-34
655
655 Private Network Digit Modification Table Assignment
9-34
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
4-39

System
120 Tenant Data Assignment
120 Tenant Data Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program enables you to select an Attendant or Night Bell to ring when dialing 0 in Day 1, Day 2 or
Day 3 mode for up to eight different Tenants. You can also assign the general purpose relay to the Night
Bell in this program.
1. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > System > Tenant Data.
2. Enter the Tenant Number or use the pull-down to select a number.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Tenant Number
Select Tenant.
Possible values: 1~8. No Data (Default)
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Type
This determines the destination type for calls dialing the Tenant Attendant
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Type
Access Code in each tenant for each time mode (Day 1, Day 2 and NIght).
03 Dial 0 Call Night Dst Type
Important!
The Tenant Attendant Access Code must be assigned in Prog 102. If
it should be "0," the Attendant Console Group Access Code, which
is "0," must be deleted.
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, Night Bell
01 Dial 0 Call Day 1 Dst Digits
Enter the PDN of the Attendant to ring when dialing Tenant Attendant Access
02 Dial 0 Call Day 2 Dst Digits
Code in Day, Day2, or Day 3 mode.
03 Dial 0 Call Night 3 Dst Digits
Possible values: Up to 32 digits for each Day Mode selected (default = no
data)
04 Night Mode Relay
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay continuously when the system is
in the night mode.
Possible values:
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU, GCTU and LCTU = relay 5
05 Night Bell Relay
Enter the General Purpose relay number assigned to the Night Bell. BIOU
relays 1~8. This operation activates the relay when a CO line or DID rings
when the system is in night mode. The CO or DID line must be assigned to
ring the night bell.
Possible values:
BIOU 1 = relay 1~4
BIOU 2 = relays 5~8
ACTU, GCTU and LCTU = relay 5
4-40
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
5
This chapter provides Strata CIX station programming information for programmers using the Strata
eManager programming interface.
Assignment
Program Number(s): 200, 204, 214, 205, 213, 215, 208, 210, 216 and 502
The following programs assign station data.
Basic/200 Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns stations to the system.
1. Use the "Basic Station Record Sheets" on page C-11 to record your desired Station settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced
Configuration > Station > Assignments.
3. Click on the Basic tab (shown right).
4. To modify an existing station, enter its DN
number in the Primary DN field or select a
DN from the list on the right side of the
screen.
5. To create a new DN with custom settings
click Create. A dialog box will appear
· Select DKT/SLT/IPT_B if you are
creating a Digital Key Telephone,
Single-line Telephone or IPT-1020SD
St
· Select IPT_L/SIP if you are creating an
a
IPT2000 series or a SIP telephone.
tion
· Enter the desired values.
· Click Submit.
6. Delete Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
7. Change DN Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN assignment
and click OK.
· Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
· Click Submit.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-1

Station
Assignment
Table 5-1
Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 PDN Equipment No.
Enter the PDN (xxyyzz). This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number of the ADKU,
BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, or RSTU interface PCB to which the PDN is, or should be
assigned.
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3;
enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200:: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Station Type
Select Station Type.
Possible values: DKT (default) or SLT
03 Circuit Type
Select Extension or Assign Voice Mail attributes to analog circuits
Possible values: Extension (default) or Voice Mail
· Extension Should be assigned to PDNs that are associated with Digital or
Standard telephones.
· Voice Mail Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail circuits.
· Announce Not used in the U.S.A. or Canada.
04 COS Day1
Assign COS to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
· Day2
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
· Night
05 DRL Day1
DRL for DAY1, Day 2 and Night
· Day2
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
· Night
06 FRL Day1
Assign FRL to Day1, Day 2 and Night modes. The higher the FRL number, the
·
more trunk access is available.
Day2
·
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
Night
07 LCR Group
Station LCR Group Number
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
08 QPL Day1
QPL for Day1, Day 2 and Night modes.
· Day2
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
· Night
5-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
Table 5-1
Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
09 Station Name
Enter Station Name to be displayed on this PDNs LCD.
Possible values: Max. 16 chars. (default = no value)
10 Call Waiting Tone
Select desired waiting tone for Offhook Campon.
Possible values: None (default), Singular or Continuity
11 Dialing Progress
Select type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code
Tone
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
12 System Call
Select the System Call Forward Group number.
Forward.
Possible values: 0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200:), 0~32 (CIX 670), (default = 0)
13 Call Pickup
The station privilege to activate Call Pickup.
Possible values: Permitted (default), Group Only or Not Permitted
14 Bearer Capability
ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations.
3.1kHzAudio (data and speech) or Speech.
Notes
· Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be set
for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
· The Strata Net IP network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech), all
standard telephone equipment must be set to 'Speech' if making calls over
Strata Net IP.
Possible values: 3.1kHzAudio or Speech (default = 3.1kHzAudio)
15 Display DN
Enter the number to be displayed on the calling telephone that rings this PDN
number. This number is will be overridden by Program 209, 04 (if assigned) and if
the PDN is in a hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
16 Caller Emergency
Enter the E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID).
Service Identification
Possible values: Up to 16 digits (default = no value), however CESID should be
(CESID)
10 digits or less for Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
(CAMA) E911 trunk. PRI E911 allows upto 16 digits.
17 Emergency Call
Enter the Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Group
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
Stat
18 Remote CF/DND
Enter password to set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another CIX
ion
Password
station; or, for Call Forward only, from a external DSIA line.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note
DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
19 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number
is prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16)
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN; and on calls to the PDN
that forward to voice mail. See Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-3

Station
Assignment
Table 5-1
Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
22 MW to VM Port
Enter the Message Waiting center DN. For Remote CIX, assign message center
including Node IP for CIX Proprietary Integration integration. This parameter
enables Cal Record function too.
Possible values: Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
23 Travelling COS
Enable this station with the privilege to change the Travelling COS Override Code.
Change
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
24 TGAC Override1
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override (for Attendant console) from
this station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
25 Service Tones
Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such a Call Waiting Tone,
should be disabled for modems, FAXes, and similar devices.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Note
Service tone such as Call Waiting should be disabled for modems, faxes,
and similar devices.
26 CW and ROB Tone
Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy
Tone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Notes
· CW tone is always two beeps.
· ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
27 Name Display
Enable the privilege to put the user name in the Directory Assistance display of a
large LCD.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
28 Door Ovr DND
Enable DND override by door phone.
Possible values: Override or Do not Override (default = Do not override)
30 Set System Speed
Privilege to set System Speed Dial numbers
Dial
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
31 Network COS
Select Network COS value.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
32 Auto OCA
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows OCA
calls to be received.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
33 Originate OCA
Enable this station with the privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Note: This privilege must be disabled for all Voice Mail and Auto Attendant ports.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
5-4
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
Table 5-1
Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
34 RSTU Supervision
This enables the auto disconnect Tandem timer in Program 104, FB06 for these
types of Connections.
Possible values: Received (default) or Not Received
Possible values: Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically
hang up, and connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect
supervision, should be set with "Not Received."
35 Station SpDial Bins
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station:
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)
36 Set SLT Dial Type
Choose DP (Old style - dial pulse dialling) or DTMF (Newer type - tone dialling).
Possible values: Possible values: DP or DTMF (default = DTMF)
37 Set Call Forward
When the handset is picked up, the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call forward is
Dial Tone
enabled.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
38 Dialing Digit
After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialling any
Restriction
subsequent digits.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
39 CO Park & Hold
You can enable or disable CO Park and Hold.
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked line
that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other stations to
press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
40 MW & DND Dial
Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone
Tone
when it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone
burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Sta
41 Activate Message
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting on
tio
Waiting
other stations by dialing the other station number plus 7, 8 or 9; or, by pressing the
n
Msg key.
Disable: This station cannot activate station-to-station message waiting on other
stations by dialing the station number plus 7, 8 or 9.
Notes
· When disabled, digital telephones are still allowed to activate station-to-station
message waiting by pressing the Msg button.
· This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports to use the special Message
Waiting access codes.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-5

Station
Assignment
Table 5-1
Station Assignment Data for DKT, SLT and IPT1020SD Telephones
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
42 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values:
1~8 (default = 1)
43 Hook-Switch Recall
Whether to start Recall when a station does On Hook in C-Hold.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
44 Auto-Campon to
This feature allows automatic camp-on to a PDN, even when it is busy and called
PDN
by a CO line. If Automatic Camp-on to PDN is enabled, a call to a PDN can camp
on even if the CO line group has auto-camp on disabled in Program 304-17.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
45 LCR PDN Code
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The
PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits table.
Possible values:
3 digits (default) or 4 digits.
46 Network Calling
Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when making
Number
external calls through the StrataNet ISDN network (32 digits max.). When this
station makes outgoing calls through the StrataNet network, this number will be
sent over the Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN connected to the far-end
node (Providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This number will be displayed as the
Caller ID number at the terminating external telephone. This number is not sent to
local PSTNs connected to the node from which the call is originated; nor is it sent
when making conventional Tie line calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end
node.
Possible values: 0 ~ 32 digits (default = no data)
47 Personal Admin
Enter the Personal Admin password for this station.
Password
Possible values: 0 ~ 16 characters (default = no data)
48 Personal Admin
Enter the Personal Admin user privilege level for this station.
Level
Possible values: Normal, Super1 or Super2 (default = Normal)
5-6
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
Table 5-2
Station Assignment Data for IPT2000 and SIP Telephones (Prog 260)
00 Prime DN
Prime DN (enter an existing PDN or enter a PDN you wish to create for a new
station)
01 Type
Assign IPT or SIP as the station type. IPT means a 2000-series IP telephone.
Possible values: IPT or SIP (default = no data)
02 PDN Equipment
Enter the PDN equipment number. This is the cabinet, slot, and circuit number
Number
of the digital or analog station card. "0000" means auto assignment.
Possible values: Cabinet: 01~02; Shelf: 01~04
03 LAN Interface
Enter "1" for an LIPU or "2" for an LIPS.
Number
Possible values: 1 (Default) or 2.
04 Circuit Type
Extension: Should be assigned to PDNs the are associated with Digital or
Standard telephones
Voice Mail: Should be assigned to PDNs associated with Voice Mail RSTU
circuits.
Possible values: Extension or Voice Mail (default = Extension)
05 COS Day1
Class of Service for Day1 mode
Possible values: 1~ 32 (default = 1)
Day2
Class of Service for Day 2 mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 32
Night
Class of Service for Night mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 32 (default = 1)
06 DRL Day1
Destination Restriction Level for Day1 Mode. (Used for Credit card calling)
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Day 2
Destination Restriction Level for Day2 Mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Night
Destination Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
07 FRL Day1
Facilities Restriction Level for Day 1 Mode.
St
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
atio
Day 2
Facilities Restriction Level for Day 2 Mode.
n
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Night
Facilities Restriction Level for Night Mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
08 LCR Group
Least Cost Routing Group Number
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
09 QPL Day1
Queuing Priority Level for Day 1 Mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-7

Station
Assignment
Table 5-2
Station Assignment Data for IPT2000 and SIP Telephones (Prog 260)
QPL Day 2
Queuing Priority Level for Day 2 Mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
QPL Night
Queuing Priority Level for Night Mode.
Possible values: 1 ~ 16 (default = 1)
10 Station LCD Name
Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN.
Possible values: 16 ASCII Characters (default = no data)
11 Dialing Progress
Type of Tone to hear after dialing LCR access code.
Tone
Possible values: Dial Tone (Default), Entry Tone or Silence
12 System Call
System Call Forward group number.
Forward
Possible values: 0 ~ 32
13 Call Pickup
The station privilege to activate Call Pickup
Possible values: Permitted (Default), Group Only or Not Permitted
14 Bearer Capability
ISDN Bearer Capability the PSTN is expecting from non ISDN stations.
3.1kHzAudio (data and speech) or Speech.
Important Note:
1. Standard telephone type data devices (modems, G3-Fax signals) must be
set for 3.1KHz audio on ISDN lines.
2. The Strata Net IP network does not support 3.1KHz (data and speech), all
standard telephone equipment must be set to 'Speech' if making calls over
Strata Net IP.
Possible values: Audio (Default) or Speech
15 Display DN
If this station is a member of a Hunt Group that has a Pilot Number and Pilot
Display Number set in Prg 209-02 and Prg. 209-04 respectively, enter the HG
Pilot Display Number in this field. This number will display on the LCD of
telephones when calling, or when called by, this station or VM port.
This is necessary for proper operation of Hunt Groups, including centralized
Voice Mail, over Strata Net.
Possible values: Dial String of 1~ 5 digits
16 CESID
E911 Calling Party Information identifier for this station (CESID). Should be a
valid NANP telephone number
Possible values: Up to 16 digits (default = no data)
17 Emergency Call
The Emergency call group that this station belongs to.
Group
Possible values: 1 (default) ~ 8
18 Remote CF/DND
Password to remotely set or cancel DND or station Call Forward from another
Password
CIX station;
or, for Call Forward only, from a external DSIA line.
Note: DND can not be set/canceled remotely from a DISA line.
Possible values: 1 ~ 4 digits (default = no data)
5-8
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
Table 5-2
Station Assignment Data for IPT2000 and SIP Telephones (Prog 260)
19 VMID Code
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls
voice mail;
or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Prg 579, 11~16)
Valid entries: digits 0~9, * and #, maximum 10 characters.
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct calls to voice mail from the PDN;
and on calls to the PDN that forward to voice mail.
Note: see Prg. 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice.
Possible values: 1 ~ 10 digits (default = no data)
20 VM MW Center Port
Message Waiting Center DN.
Enter the VM PDN or Pilot DN number that should display on telephone LCDs
when calling Voice Mail or receiving calls from Voice mail.
Possible values: Valid DN (default = no data)
21 Travel COS Change
Privilege Change the Travelling Class of Service Override Code.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
22 TGAC Override
Trunk Group Access Code Override for Attendant console,
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
23 Service Tones
Disable Services Tone for Data Privacy. Service tone, such a Call Waiting
Tone, should be disabled for modems, FAXes, and similar devices.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
24 CW and ROB Tone
Enable/Disable the station to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over
Busy Tone.
CW tone is always two beeps.
ROB tone can be two beeps or continuous as set in PRG 204, 27.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
25 Name Display
Privilege to put the user name in the list display of Large LCD (Directory
Assistance)
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
St
26 Door Over DND
Enable DND to be overridden by door a phone
ati
Possible values: Override or Not Override (default = Not Override)
on
27 Set System Speed
Privilege to set System Speed Dial numbers
Dial
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
28 Network COS
Network Class Of Service number
Possible values: 1~ 32 (default = 1)
29 Auto OCA
OCA occurs automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows
OCA calls to be received.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-9

Station
Assignment
Table 5-2
Station Assignment Data for IPT2000 and SIP Telephones (Prog 260)
30 Originate OCA
The privilege to make OCA calls to other stations.
Important Note: This privilege must be disabled for all Voice Mail and Auto
Attendant ports.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
31 RSTU Supervision
Devices connected to RSTU circuits that do not automatically hang up, and
connect to CO lines that do not provide disconnect supervision,
should be set with "Not Received". This enables the auto disconnect Tandem
timer in PRG 104, PB06 for these types of connections.
Possible Values: Received or Not Received (default = Received)
32 Station SpDial Bins
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station
Possible values: 0 ~ 100 (maximum=100 per station).
33 Call Forward Dial
When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if Station Call
Tone
Forward is set on the telephone.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
34 Dialing Digit
After the Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialing any
Restriction
subsequent digits
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
35 CO Park & Hold
Enabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked
line that appear on other stations will be on hold. This will allow the other
stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Disabled: When this station parks a line call, CO or GCO buttons of the parked
line that appear on other stations will appear busy. This will prevent the other
stations to press the CO or GCO button to pickup the parked call.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Disabled)
36 MW & DND Dial
Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial
Tone
tone when it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a
busy tone burst before dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message
waiting or when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
37 Activate Message
Enable: This station is allowed to activate station-to-station message waiting
Waiting
on other stations by dialing
the other station number plus 7, 8 or 9; or by pressing the Msg key.
Disable: This station can not activate station-to-station message waiting on
other stations by dialing
the station number plus 7, 8, 9; or by pressing the Msg key.
Notes, This parameter does not apply to Voice Mail ports, they use the special
Message Waiting access codes.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
38 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned
Possible values: 1~ 8 (default = 1)
5-10
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
Table 5-2
Station Assignment Data for IPT2000 and SIP Telephones (Prog 260)
39 Hook-Switch Recall
1: Enable Recall for Digital Telephones for normal operation.
2: Disable Recall on Standard Telephones that produce hook-switch bounce
when they are hung-up - this prevents annoying ring recalls when the user
hangs up on a call.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
40 Auto-Campon to
Enable - to allow auto-campon to this PDN, when busy and called by a CO line
PDN
even if the CO line group has auto-campon disabled in Program 304-17.
Disable - to not allow auto-campon to this PDN when called by a CO line if the
CO line group has auto-campon disabled in Program 304-17.
Notes
1. Auto-campon will always occur on the PDN if the calling CO line group has
auto-campon enabled in Program 304-17 regardless of how this option is set.
2. Auto-campon will be applied or not to PhDNs according to the PhDN owner
PDN setting for this option.
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (default = Enabled)
41 LCR PDN Code
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code.
The PDN code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits Table.
Possible values: G711, G729A or None (default = G729A)
42 Network Calling
Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when
Number
making external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.).
When this station makes outgoing calls through the Strata Net network, this
number will be sent over the Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN
connected to the far-end node (Providing this is allowed by the PSTN). This
number will be displayed as the Caller ID number at the terminating external
telephone. This number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to the node from
which the call is originated; nor is it sent when making conventional Tie line
calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values: 32 Digits Max.
43 Personal Password
Enter the Personal Admin password for this station.
Possible values: 16 Characters Max
44 Personal Admin
Enter the Personal Admin user privilege level for this station.
Level
Possible values: Normal, Super 1 or Super2 (default = Normal)
St
45 Speaker OCA
Enable or disable Speaker OCA on an IP telephone.
atio
Possible values: Enabled or Disabled (Default)
n
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-11

Station
Assignment
Station PDN Selective Copy
This screen provides you the option of selecting either all or some of the parameters to be copied to the
destination PDNs.
Using this screen you can do any of the following functions:
· Copy to multiple destination PDNs.
· Check All to highlight all the parameters to be copied.
... or select individual/multiple parameter(s) to be copied.
1. Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignments. Enter the Primary DN.
2. Click Selective Copy. The Selective Copy screen displays.
3. Check Highlight All to highlight all the parameters to be copied.
... or select individual/multiple parameter(s) to be copied.
Note If you want to copy almost all items and leave out a few, you can check Highlight All and then click
on the items that you don't want to copy to deselect them.
4. Click Copy Now to start the copying process.
5. When copy is complete, a dialog box displays that reads "End of Copy!"
Note You can return to the previous page and/or reselect copy to different destination PDNs by clicking
Back.
PDN Table View
The PDN Table View displays the following parameters that are set in Program 200/260--Station
Equipment Number, Type, Extension/Voice Mail, Primary DN, User Name, PDN VMID, COS, DRL,
FRL, LCR Group, System Call Forward Template, Network COS, the quantity of Station Speed Dial bins
and Tenant.
ä To access the extended list
ä Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignments and click the PDN Table View button at the
bottom of the screen. The Extended List spreadsheet displays after it downloads from the CIX. This
takes some time depending on the CIX connection speed and database size.
The screen may be kept up and moved around to use as a reference and can be printed. The Extended
List spreadsheet can be sorted by all 20 columns and sorting can be toggled between Ascending and
Descending order. The entire table can be printed using the Print button on the screen.
5-12
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
204 DKT Parameters
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command is used to set up DKT digital telephones station parameters.
1. Use the "DKT Parameters Record Sheet" on page C-12 to record your desired DKT settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the DKT tab.
4. To modify an existing station, enter its DN number in the Primary DN field or select a DN from the list
on the right side of the screen.
5. To create a new DN with custom settings click Create. A dialog box will appear
· Select DKT/SLT/IPT_B if you are creating a Digital Key Telephone, Single-line Telephone or IPT-
1020SD
· Select IPT_L/SIP if you are creating an IPT2000 series or a SIP telephone.
· Enter the desired values.
· Click Submit.
6. Delete Enter a Primary DN or a range of Primary DNs to delete and click OK.
7. Change DN Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN. Enter the new DN assignment
and click OK.
· Setup the DN by adding values to the remaining fields.
· Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Station Type
Select the Station Type. When set to Attendant, the system can support four
circuits.
Possible values: Extension (default) or Attendant
02 Key Strip Pattern
This option allows you select a pre-defined keystrip pattern and submit it to the
digital telephone. It does not display what pre-defined keystrip (if any) has been
assigned to the telephone.
Use the Key tab screen to view or edit telephone keystrip assignments.
CAUTION!
Submitting a keystrip pattern will overwrite existing keys
St
programmed on a telephone.
atio
Default key strip patterns for digital telephones. The selected Pattern is applied to
n
the 'Key Strip Type' parameter.
None applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons.
Pattern 1 applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons and DND.
Pattern 2 applies PDN to button 01, plus line buttons, One-Touch buttons and
DND.
Pattern 3 applies PDN to button 01 and blank to all other buttons. (DKT3014 uses
only Pattern 1 or None).
Possible values: Pattern 1, 2 or None (default)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-13

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 Key Strip Type
Select the number of feature buttons to assign to this station.
Note
Although the scroll down menu enables you to choose any value from
1~24, valid values are 10, 14 and 20.
Possible values: 1, 3, 7, 8, 10, 14 or 20 (default)
Applies 1, 3, 10, 14, or 20 button keystrip type to digital telephones:
1 and 3 button keystrips apply to DKT2001 and DKT3001|
7 button keystrips apply to DKT3007 and SoftIPT
8 button keystrips apply to IPT2008-SDL
10 button keystrips apply to DKT2010 and DKT30010
14 button keystrips apply to the Large LCD DKT3014
20 button keystrips apply to DKT2020 and DKT3020.
04 Add on Modules
Select the number of Add On Modules (ADM) assigned to this station. This field is
required if you want to program ADM FBs in Program 213. See "Key" on page 5-22.
Possible values: None (default), 1 unit, or 2 units
05 Tone First /Voice
Set PDN to have Tone First or Voice First signaling when called.
First
For each iES32 PDN, set to "Tone First", if set to Voice First iES32 will not answer.
Possible values: Tone or Voice (default)
06 OCA Type
Select the OCA type. This field must be programmed with Auto OCA Originate
below.
Possible values: Handset (default) or Speaker
09 Handsfree MIC
If you call a station configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter
Setting
to enable the called parties microphone from your DKT.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
10 Handsfree Tone
If you call a DKT configured for Voice First signalling, you can use this parameter to
send a splash tone to the called party.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
11 Ext. Ring Repeat
Enable repetitive ringing for incoming CO / PBX / Centrex signals. Disabling this
parameter defaults to standard CO ringing pattern (1 sec on / 3 sec Off).
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
5-14
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
13 Off Hook
Select Off Hook Preference.
Preference
Possible values: Idle, Ringing, Prime, No Preference, Prime and Idle, Prime and
Ringing or Ringing and Idle (default)
When a digital telephone user goes off hook, presses the Spkr Button or dials a digit
while the telephone is idle (Hot Dial Pad), the telephone will select an idle PDN or
Line button, or answer an incoming call, according to the preferences set in this
command.
This command works in conjunction with the "14 PDN/Line preference" and "15 Call
Answer Preference" programs.
The possible values are described as follows:
· Idle The telephone will select an idle DN or Line button depending on the "14
PDN or Line preference" choice. In either case priority is always the lowest
numbered button that is idle. The telephone will not answer ringing calls
automatically.
· Ringing The telephone will answer a ringing call (any PDN, secondary DN,
PhDN, or any Line type button) by call type or longest ringing button depending
on the "15 Call Answer Preference" choice. The telephone will not automatically
select a DN or Line button when going off hook to originate a call.
· Primary DN The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN button, if
idle or ringing, no matter what the status is of other buttons on the telephone.
· No Preference The telephone will not select any button when the user goes off
hook or presses the Spkr button. This selection will also disable the telephone's
Hot Dial Pad feature.
· Primary DN and Idle The telephone will automatically try to select the PDN
button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select an idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or another idle DN button
(14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).
· Primary DN and Ringing The telephone will automatically try to select the
PDN button, if idle or ringing. If the PDN is busy the telephone will select a
ringing Line button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or a ringing
DN button (14 PDN or Line preference - PDN Preference).
· Ringing and Idle The telephone will always answer any ringing call according
to "15 Call Answer Preference". If a call is not ringing it will select an idle Line
button (14 PDN or Line preference - Line Preference) or idle DN button (14 PDN
or Line preference - PDN Preference).
14 PDN/Line
Offhook preference button Type.
Preference
Possible values: CO Key or DN Key (default)
· CO Line buttons - Line buttons (any type CO, Pooled or Group CO line button)
St
have priority over DN buttons with "13 Off Hook Preference" choices. The
a
lowest numbered line button on the telephone has priority over other line
tio
buttons for idle selection.
n
· Primary DN button - DN buttons (any type PDN, Secondary DN or PhDN button)
have priority over Line buttons with "13 Off Hook Preference" choices. The PDN
button has first priority for idle selection, the lowest numbered DN button on the
telephone has priority over other DN buttons for idle selection if the PDN button
is busy.
Note
Off hook ringing selections are also based on "15 Call Answer Preference"
choices.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-15

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 Ringing Preference
Ringing call answer preference.
Possible values: Longest or Call Type (default)
· Longest Ringing - any call type - Calls are answered in order of the longest
ringing line no matter what type of call (FIFO).
· Longest Ringing - by call type priority - Call Type priority is applied to the longest
ringing button.
Call Type Priorities are fixed is software as shown below:
· Emergency Calls
· Hands Free Calls (after it is switched to ringing by the caller).
· ACD calls
· Recalls (Hold recall, Automatic call back, ABR, etc.)
· External Calls (DID, DIT DISA line calls etc.)
· Internal Calls (station, Attendant, Tie line, door phone, etc.)
16 Text Message
Select whether to display an LCD text message. Immediate displays the message.
Display
Not immediate does not display the message.
Possible values: Immediate (default) or Not Immediate
17 Call History
Enter the number of calls to be stored in memory for this station.
Memory
Possible values: 0~100 (default = 0)
18 DTMF Back Tone
Enables audible DTMF when dialing from a DKT to a trunk or Voice Mail port.
Padded dialing mutes the volume level to the caller not the called trunk or VM
device.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
19 Continuous DTMF
Enable / Disable Continuous DTMF for DKT2000 and DTK3000 series telephones.
Enabled allows the telephone to send DTMF tones to the far end continuously as
long as the key on the dial pad is held down.
Notes
· For each iES32 PDN, set to 'Not Continuous', if set to 'Continuous', outdial
notification to pagers and calls to AMIS nodes will not function properly.
· DKT1000 series telephones do not support continuous DTMF. DKT1000 series
telephones must be set to 'Not Continuous' or they will misdial.
Possible values: Continuous (default) or Not Continuous
20 Display Language
Select the LCD Display Language.
Possible values: English (default), British English or French
Note
The display language must also be set at IPT2008-SLD stations using
access code #495.
21 Adapter
Select the Adapter Type (Desktop OAI or Attendant Console).
· BPCI for USB interface.
· BATI for PC Attendant Console Interface.
Possible values: None (default), BPCI or BATI
22 Blind Transfer
Set Blind Transfer Action (Attendant Type Only).
Possible values: Leave or Separate (default)
5-16
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
23 Mail Box Selection
Select the method to enter the destination Mailbox for Call Recording. If set to
"Auto" CIX uses the VM ID of the station initiating the record function.
Notes
· The DN assigned as the MSG center in PROG 200 is used to call the VM port or
Hunt group (PROG 200 FK 22).
· When set to "Auto" the VM-ID of the station initiating the record function is sent
to Stratagy ES as the destination mailbox.
· When set to "Manual Input" the user may enter any valid Mailbox followed by
the "#" sign. If the user Presses "#" without additional data the CIX will send the
VMID of the originating station.
Possible values: Auto or Manual (default)
24 MIC Init. Value
Turn on the microphone automatically when making a speaker phone call.
Note
The microphone must be enabled.
Possible values: On (default) or Off
25 Microphone
Enable microphone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
26 Speaker Mode
Enable telephone to receive Call Waiting (Camp-on) and Ring Over Busy Tone
Tones
while on a speaker phone call.
Possible values: Yes (default) or No
27 Ring Over Busy
Set ROB to ring two times or continuously.
Cycles
Possible values: Two Cycles or Continuous (default)
Note
See PRG200, 26 to enable ROB to be sent to individual telephones.
28 Attd Overflow Dest.
Select overflow destination for attendant.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = none)
29 Trunk Test and
Allow Trunk Tests and Verification.
Verify
Possible values: Yes or No (default)
30 Auto Line Hold
Enable Automatic Line Hold. This parameter allows a station to "line hop" from one
call to another automatically by placing the first call on hold.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
St
31 Call Progress
Allows the telephone to be set to ring or not ring when busy on a call. If a telephone
a
Dependency
has multiple DNs (PDN + PhDNs), set this parameter to the Line Mode.
tion
Line Mode: Calls will ring the telephone when the user is talking on a line or DN
button if the telephone has multiple DN or line buttons in a hunt configuration. If Call
Forward Busy/No Answer is set, the telephone will Ring No Answer and then
forward when a call is delivered to the telephone while the user is talking on a DN or
CO line button.
Terminal Mode: Callers will receive busy tone when any DN or CO line button on
the telephone is in-use. If Call Forward Busy/No Answer is set on the telephone a
call to the telephone will forward immediately when a call is delivered while the user
is talking on any DN or CO line button.
Possible values: Line Mode (default) or Terminal Mode
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-17

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
32 Programming Mode
Enable: Allows the telephone to enter the Programming Mode. Disable: Restricts
the telephone from entering the Programming Mode.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
33 Stop Sending LCD
Turn this parameter On to stop sending LCD information to this port. This must be
Data
turned on for Stratagy iES32 voice assistant ports.
Possible values: On or Off (default = Off)
34 Administrator
Enable to allow this telephone to function as an Administrator telephone.
Phone
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
35 Pool Line No Flash
Enable this feature if pooled line buttons should only flash when they ring this
telephone. If disabled, pooled line buttons will flash on this telephone when the
pooled line is ringing any telephone - even if not ringing this telephone.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
36 Eclusive Hold
Enable: If the user presses the Hold button twice in succession the telephone
places the current call on Exclusive Hold.
Disable: The telephone can not place calls on Exclusive Hold.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
37 Dial Directory - Off
Enable: Allows access to the telephone Dial Directory by going Off-Hook, pressing
Hook
the Spkr button or pressing the first softkey on the left side of the LCD.
Disable: Denies access to the telephone Dial Directory by going Off-Hook or the
pressing the Spkr button. User must press the first softkey on the left side of the
LCD to access the Directory Dial feature.
Note
This option only applies to 7, 10, and 20 button telephones with small
LCDs.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
38 Dial Directory -
Enable: Allows user to originate a call by going Off-Hook, pressing the Spkr button
Make Call
or pressing the CALL softkey after finding a Name using the small LCD telephone
Dial Directory feature.
Disable: User must press the CALL softkey to originate a call using the small LCD
telephone Directory Dial feature. After finding a Name, nothing will happen when
going off-hook or pressing the Spkr button.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
5-18
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
Feature Button Patterns
The following tables show the various feature button patterns available for FB02 above.
Table 5-1
20 Button (when FB03 value is 20)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Primary DN
Primary DN
Primary DN
FB02
CO 1
CO 1
No Data
FB03
CO 2
CO 2
No Data
FB04
CO 3
CO 3
No Data
FB05
CO 4
CO 4
No Data
FB06
CO 5
CO 5
No Data
FB07
CO 6
CO 6
No Data
FB08
CO 7
CO 7
No Data
FB09
CO 8
CO 8
No Data
FB10
CO 9
CO 9
No Data
FB11
CO 10
CO 10
No Data
FB12
CO 11
CO 11
No Data
FB13
CO 12
CO 12
No Data
FB14
CO 13
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB15
CO 14
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB16
CO 15
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB17
CO 16
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB18
CO 17
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB19
CO 18
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB20
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
No Data
Station
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-19

Station
Assignment
Table 5-2
10 Button (when FB03 value is 10)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Primary DN
Primary DN
Primary DN
FB02
CO 1
CO 1
No Data
FB03
CO 2
CO 2
No Data
FB04
CO 3
CO 3
No Data
FB05
CO 4
CO 4
No Data
FB06
CO 5
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB07
CO 6
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB08
CO 7
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB09
CO 8
Single Touch Button
No Data
FB10
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
No Data
Table 5-3
14 Button (when FB03 value is 14)
PATTERN1
PATTERN2
PATTERN3
FB01
Primary DN
Primary DN
Primary DN
FB02
CO 1
No Data
No Data
FB03
CO 2
No Data
No Data
FB04
CO 3
No Data
No Data
FB05
CO 4
No Data
No Data
FB06
CO 5
No Data
No Data
FB07
No Data
No Data
No Data
FB08
CO 7
No Data
No Data
FB09
CO 8
No Data
No Data
FB10
CO 9
No Data
No Data
FB11
CO 10
No Data
No Data
FB12
CO 11
No Data
No Data
FB13
Do Not Disturb
No Data
No Data
FB14
No Data
No Data
No Data
5-20
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
214 DSS Console Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This assignment allows up to eight Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles to be assigned to a station. The
assignment is referenced to the stations's Primary DN.
1. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignment.
2. Click on the DSS tab.
3. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field or click the list on the right side of the screen
4. Enter the Equipment number in which the DSS(s) is installed.
5. "Get Default" will set all data to the factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Enter the PDN of the station that is to be associated with the DSS console(s).
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits (default = no value).
01~08 DSS Equipment
Enter the DSS equipment number as xxyyzz.
No. 1~8
Cabinet Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet (CIX100). Select 01 ~ 02 for
CIX200. Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet
(CIX670).
Slot Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots (CIX100).
Select 01 ~ 04 for CIX200. Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion
slots (CIX670).
Example: If the DSS console should be connected to a PDKU or BDKU/BDKS in
cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
If a PDN is assigned to the DSS equipment number it must be deleted, using
PRG201, before attempting to assign the DSS console.
Station
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-21

Station
Assignment
Key
Program Number(s): 205, 213, and 215
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1 and 204 page 5-13
The Feature Button assignments enable each button on the telephone to be addressed and coded to
represent a function or feature to be performed. Some feature buttons require additional parameters to
completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone
pitch when ringing occurs).
1. Use the "Feature Button Record Sheet" on page C-13 to plan your FB assignments.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Key tab.
Notes
· To Program DSS buttons, Program 214 should be completed.
· To program ADM buttons (ADM 1 or ADM 2), FB04 Add on Modules in Program 204 must be set to
One or Two.
4. Enter one of the following in the Primary DN field:
· Primary DN to program DKT FBs.
· Primary DN plus an ADM number to Program ADM FBs.
· Primary DN plus DSS Key Assignment button to program DSS FBs
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List view a summary list of programmed DKTs.
· Extended List view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
· Copy After entering the source DN in the Primary DN field, click Copy and designate which FB
buttons to copy (click the DKT Phone header to select all). Enter the destination DN and click OK.
(Range is permitted.)
· Cross Copy This button enables you to copy specific keys from a station's keypad to desired keys
of other station key pads. This function is available only with Strata eManager R2.1 and above.
Refer to "Cross Copy" on page 5-25 for steps to use this function.
Distinctive Ringing Enables you to set different incoming ringing tones for internal and external calls on
a Prime DN. Ten different tones are available. This can be set from Programs 205, 213 and 215.
ä To set Distinctive Ringing, double click the button that you want to set distinctive ringing. A dialog box
displays.
Click the drop-down arrows to set the External and Internal tone pitches. The possible values are shown
in Table 5-4.
Notes
You must have the following versions of processor boards for Distinctive Ringing:
l
CIX100: ACTU1A, V.2D or later.
CIX200: LCTU
CIX 670: BECU1A, V.1C or later.
For any older versions of processor boards, you can assign only "01" to Tone Pitch for internal
l
calls and you can assign only "11," "13," "15," or "17" to Tone Pitch for external calls.
Ringing tone pitch has no effect on telephone volume.
l
5-22
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
When programming External Ringing Repeat with a Distinctive Ringing Pitch, we recommend
l
that you use pitches "11" or "12" and not "17" or "18".
Incoming recall tone cannot be changed.
l
Calls to Tie lines adopt the internal call pitch.
l
Table 5-4
Internal and External Call Ringing Tones
Tone No.
Frequency and Cadence
01
500 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
02
1300 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
11
500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
12
500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
13
860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
14
860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
15
1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat
16
1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat
17
860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 3 sec. Off, repeat
18
860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. Off, repeat
5. Click on the FB to program (the button turns from yellow to red).
6. Click the desired option from the blue parameter buttons on the right.
· Directory No Assign a Primary DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message Waiting,
or DSS key to this FB. See "Directory Number Sub-parameters" on page 5-25 for more details.
· CO Lines Assign FB as a CO, GCO or a Pooled Line. See "CO Lines Sub-parameters" on
page 5-27 for more details.
· Features Assign ABR, ACB, DND, Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy Release, BGM Key,
Program Access, Account Code, Application Starting, Split Key, or System Alarm feature to this
FB.
· Call Control Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer, Cancel, Source Party,
Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer from this FB.
· Call Forward Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All Calls, Forward Busy,
Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer, Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/Busy, Forward
St
Ext/No Answer and Forward Ext/Busy No Answer are available selections.
atio
· Park Page Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All Emergency Paging, Individual
n
Emergency Paging and Paging Answer Feature access to this FB.
· Call Pickup Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal, Pickup-Directed Group,
Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External, Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local Retrieve, Pickup-
Remote, Pickup-Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and Incoming.
· Door Lock Enable FB to unlock Door Lock. See "Door Lock Sub-parameters" on page 5-27 for
more details.
· Voice Mail Enable FB to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.
· Attendant Assign Out Dial, Attendant Answer, Overflow, Position Busy, Trunk Test, Attendant
Loop or Supervised Loop Key Attendant features to this FB.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-23

Station
Assignment
· ACD Assign Log In/Out, Available/Unavailable, Work Unit, ACD Help, ACD Pickup, End
WrapUp, Join ACD Call, Monitor ACD Call, Start/End Shift, Display Status, or UCD Agent Login/
Out features to this FB.
· One Touch Assign FB as a One Touch button. See "Setting the One Touch Button" on page 5-25.
· Split Assign FB to Split the connected party and the conference master from the conference (for
private call). (Join button is used to reconnect both parties to the conference.) The Split button
should not be assigned to a DKT2304-CT cordless telephone.
· Blank Clear FB assignment.
7. Click on one feature in the sub-parameter dialog box. If no other settings are required, the FB displays
an abbreviation for the selected feature.
... or if you select Directory No, CO Lines or Door Lock parameters, additional fields are required. See
the tables that follow for more details. Follow the directions in each pop-up dialog box.
8. To modify an existing feature button, double-click the feature button and make the change in the
appropriate dialog box that displays.
9. Click Submit.
5-24
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
Cross Copy
Use the following steps to cross copy keys from one station to the keys of another stations key pad:
1. From the Key Page, enter the Prime DN.
2. Click Submit.
3. Click the Cross Copy button. The Source and Target
Copy screen displays (shown right). Enter the "Copy
To" PDNs
... or click Select to select the target PDN.
4. From the Source DKT, select key to be copied.
5. Click the Copy Now button. The Detail report screen
displays.
6. Click Done. The Target DKT with the copied key
displays.
7. Verify the key copied.
Setting the One Touch Button
Follow the step above 1~8 above to assign an FB as a One Touch button. Then complete the following
steps:
1. Double click the key assigned as One Touch.
2. The following dialog box displays
This dialog box is used to define each button with the One Touch Data.
3. Enter the One Touch data, then click OK.
Example 1: Setting up a One Touch button to transfer to Voice Mail.
Select the Cnf/Trn from the white box on the right, CNF displays in the One Touch Data field. Then
type #407 after CNF displays in the One Touch Data box. It adds Cnf/Trn #407 in the One Touch Data.
Click OK. Then click Submit.
Example 2: To originate a call from the PDN, select the FK as 01 if the PDN is on the first key, then
add the telephone number next to FK01 in the One Touch Data box.
Cancel clears the changes and takes you back to the previous page.
Directory Number Sub-parameters
St
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ation
Primary DN
1. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
2. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-25

Station
Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Secondary/Phantom DN
1. Enter DN Number.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed
Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Phantom DN Message
Enter Phantom DN No.
Warning
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
DSS Key
Enter DSS Primary DN No.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
5-26
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
CO Lines Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
CO
1. Select CO Line #.
Possible values: 1~264 (CIX200, CIX670), 1~64 (CIX100) (default = no value)
2. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
3. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
4. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
GCO
1. Select GCO No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CIX200, CIX670), 1~32 (CIX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Index.
Possible values: 1~128 (CIX200, CIX670), 1~32 (CIX100) (default = no value)
3. Enter Owner DN.
Possible values: Any string up to 5 digits
4. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
5. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Pooled Line Key
1. Select Pool Line No.
Possible values: 1~128 (CIX200, CIX670), 1~32 (CIX100) (default = no value)
2. Select Ringing Assignment for Day1, Day2 and Night.
Possible values: No RIng, Immediate Ring, Delayed Ring1 and Delayed Ring2.
3. Select Tone Pitch.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = 1)
Door Lock Sub-parameters
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Door Unlock
Select Door Lock No.
Sta
Possible values: 1~10 (default = 1)
tion
Station Flexible Button Assignments
Use the "Record Sheets for 10-button and 20-button Telephones" on page C-14 and "Record Sheets for the
DKT3014" on page C-15 to plan your Station Flexible Button Assignments.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-27

Station
Assignment
Timer
Program Number(s): 208
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns timing parameters to Primary DNs.
1. Complete the "Station Data Record Sheets" on page C-18.
2. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the Timer tab.
4. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field.
... or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
· List select from the list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
· Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Prime DN
Enter the Prime DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 ABR Retry Count
Enter the number of retry attempts made by ABR when dialing a busy telephone
number.
Possible values: 5~20 (default = 15)
02 ABR Retry Interval
Select the amount of time (in seconds) ABR waits between dialing attempts.
Timer
Possible values: 30~180 (default = 60)
03 ABR Recall Timer
Select the number of seconds ABR will call back the station after receiving ring back
tone from the dialed number.
Possible values: 5~60 (default = 20)
04 Hold Recall Timer
Select the number of seconds before a held call recalls.
Possible values: 0~255 (default = 60)
05 First Interdigit
Enter the First Interdigit Timer in seconds.
Timer
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
06 Second Interdigit
Enter the Second Interdigit Timer in seconds
Timer
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
07 Ring Xfer No
Enter the Ring Xfer No Answer Timer in seconds.
Answer Timer
Possible values: 1~600 (default = 32)
Emergency Ringdown Assignment
Program Number(s): 216
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Emergency Ring Down parameters to Primary DNs.
5-28
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Assignment
1. Complete the "Station Data Record Sheets" on page C-18.
2. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignment.
3. Click on the RingDown tab.
4. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field.
... or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
· List select from the list on the right side of the screen.
· Extended List view a detailed list of programmed DKTs.
· Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN to assign existing
Station Timer settings.
5. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
6. Click Submit
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Emergency Ringdown
Enable an Emergency Ringdown Number.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
02 Emergency Ringdown
Enter the length of off-hook time that will cause a DN to originate an Emergency
Timer
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 0)
Note
For DKT and IPT stations do not set the time to more than 30 seconds.
03 Destination
Enter the destination DN for the Emergency Ringdown.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Station
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-29

Station
206 Phantom DN
206 Phantom DN
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Phantom DN parameters.
1. Complete the "Phantom DN Record Sheet" on page C-16.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Phantom DN. The Station
Phantom DN screen displays.
3. Enter a Phantom DN number
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List view a summary list of programmed Phantom DNs.
· Copy Enter the Phantom DN to copy data from, then click Copy and designate a Phantom DN to
copy the data too. Click OK.
· Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Click Submit.

FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Phantom DN
Enter Phantom DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
01 Owner PDN
Set PhantomDN's Owner Station
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Tone/Voice First
Choose Tone First or Voice First signaling
Possible values: Tone First (default) or Voice First
04 Display DN
Enter the number displayed on the calling telephone that rings this Phantom DN
number.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number is overridden by the number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the
Phantom DN is in a hunt group. When calling from this Phantom DN, the number
displayed on the called telephone appears in order of priority as follows:
This number in Program 209, FB04 (if assigned) and if the PhDN is in a hunt group.
... or this number in Program 200, FB15 (if assigned).
... or the calling telephone's PDN.
05 System Call Forward
Select the System Call Forward value.
Possible values: 0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 0~32 (CIX 670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
5-30
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
206 Phantom DN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 VM ID Code
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PhDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PhDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (This number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, FB11~FB16).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF tones on
direct calls to voice mail from the PhDN; and on calls to the PhDN that forward to voice
mail (see Program 580 for SMDI or DTMF choice).
Note
Do not enter a VMID code in this field if this PhDN is associated with a PDN in
a multiple DN hunt group (Program 209, FB06).
The associated PDN's VMID code (Program 200, FB19) will be sent to voice mail.
09 Message Center
Enter the Message Waiting Center DN, VM Pilot Number or lowest member of VM hunt
group.
Up to 7 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 User Name
Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PhDN
Possible values: Up to 8 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 Display Name
Select radio button for user name to be included in the list display of Large LCD
(Directory Assistance)
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Station
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-31

Station
209 Hunt Group
209 Hunt Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
This command assigns Station Hunting Group data.
1. Complete the "Hunt Group Record Sheet" on page C-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Hunt Group. The Station Hunt
Group displays.
3. Click on the Group tab.
4. Enter a Group Number for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
· Create Assign a new Hunt Group with custom settings.
· Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Group Number
Hunt Group Number
Possible values: 1~90 (CIX100), 1~200 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic and CIX670
Basic),1~640 (CIX670 Exp.)
(default = no value)
01 Hunt Method
Select Hunt Method
Possible values: Distributed (for Voice Mail and UCD hunt groups) or Circular (for
Multiple DN hunt groups) (default)
02 Pilot Number
Enter Pilot Directory Number. This is the number that is dialed to call the hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value) any type of hunt group
can have a pilot number.
Note
Any type of hunt group can have a pilot number. Distributed hunt groups must
have a pilot number. Voice Mail hunt groups should be Distributed with a Pilot
Number. Multiple DN Hunt groups should be Circular with no Pilot Number.
04 Number to Display
Enter the number that is displayed when called by, or when calling any member of the
hunt group.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Note
This number should be the DH Group Pilot number for Voice Mail hunt groups.
This number could be the PDN of a Multiple DN Hunt group, in which case the
number would override the number assigned in Program 200, FB15 for PDNs
and Program 206, FB04 for Phantom DNs.
05 Pilot No. SCFwd
Allows you to assign a System Call Forward pattern to the Pilot Number of a Hunt
Group.
Possible values: 0~4 (CIX100), 0~10 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 0~32 (CIX670 Exp.)
(default = 0)
06 Muitple DN Hunt
Enable if hunt group is created for multiple DN operation. Multiple DN hunt groups
should be circular with no pilot number. Set to Disable for UCD group.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
5-32
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
209 Hunt Group
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
07 DHG Auto Camp-on
Whether to execute Automatic Camp On to the Distributed Hunt Group or not.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
Should be applied to VM Distributed Hunt Groups so callers automatically camp on to
Voice Mail when all VM ports are busy. Does not apply to Circular or Serial hunt groups.
Set to Enable for UCD group
08 UCD Enable/Disable
To turn on or off the Universal Call Distribution feature.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
09 UCD MOH Source
Select which MOH interface will be connected to the music source of the Universal Call
Distribution. This source will be played to calls in the UCD Queue.
Possible values: No MOH Source, BIOU-1-J1~J3, processor MOH Jack, BIOU-2-
J1~J3, XSTU-1~8
Note
Maximum 128 calls in queue at one time.
10 UCD Overflow
Select the amount of time that UCD calls should remain in the UCD Queue before they
Timer
overflow.
Possible values: 1 to 3600 seconds in 1 second intervals (default = 300 seconds)
Note
The overflow destination is the destination assigned to the UCD Pilot System
Call Forward-No Answer Timer.
11 UCD RBT Timer
If no UCD agents are available when a call is routed to the UCD group, the caller will
hear Ring Back Tone (RBT) for the length of time set for this timer. After this time expires
the caller will be routed from RBT to the UCD MOH interface.
Possible values: 0~30
Default = 10
218 Station Hunt Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 209 page 5-32
This program assigns station DNs to Hunt Groups using Program 209, and assigns the rotation order in
which DNs are hunted.
1. Complete the "Hunt Group Record Sheet" on page C-17.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Hunt Group. The Station Hunt
Group Assignment screen displays.
St
3. Click on the Member tab (shown right).
atio
4. Enter a Member Number for an existing record
n
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List Select from the list of programmed Hunt Groups on the right side of the screen.
· Add Assign a new station DN to the Hunt Group number entered above.
· Append Assign a new DN as the last DN in a Hunt Group's hunt order.
· Modify Highlight an existing DN in the Hunt Order and change the station DN assignment.
· Delete Delete station DN assignment to Hunt Order number
· Get Default - Sets all data to factory defaults.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-33

Station
209 Hunt Group
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Hunt Group Number
Enter an existing Hunt Group number or use the List, Add, Append, Modify, or Delete
buttons as described above.
Possible values: 1~640 (default = no value)
01 Hunt Order
This field assigns a station DNs position within a Hunt Group's Hunt Order. The Hunt
Order is selected automatically by Strata eManager. Programmers should assign the last
station in the Hunt Order first and assign the first station in the Hunt Order last.
Possible values: 1~560 (default = no value)
02 DN
By selecting the Insert button you can add a new DN to the Hunt Group's Hunt Order.
Enter the desired DN in the pop-up dialog box.
To modify an existing entry, use the Modify button as described above.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
03 DN Set Type
Modify (replace) an existing assignment.
Possible values: Modify (default) or Insert
5-34
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Hunt Group Table View
Hunt Group Table View
Hunt Group Table View enables you to view all hunt groups and its members.
ä To access the Hunt Group Table View
ä Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Hunt Group Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-26 for table functionality.
Note This table has more functions in addition to the regular functionality found in other table views.
The Navigation Bar has the following additional buttons:
· Delete Click on a row to delete any directory number from a Hunt Group, then click the Delete
button. When the Delete button is active, the Add button and the Delete Group button will not be active.
To unselect a row that is selected (in yellow), click the row again.
· Add To add directory numbers to a hunt group select the Hunt group in the table view from the
Navigation drop down in the Navigation bar, then click the Add button.
If no rows are selected, the Add button is active. Click the Add button to add members to Hunt groups.
When you click the Add button, the Add dialog box displays.
Select the DN from the Available Directory Numbers box, then click the Arrow button in the center.
This moves the DN to Hunt Group box on the left. Click Add now to Save the entry or Cancel to cancel.
Clicking Add Now automatically refreshes the table view.
In the dialog box, if you want 6200 to appear before 5200, click 6200 on the right, then click 5200 on
the left and then click the arrow in the center.
· Select All and Unselect All Clicking these buttons, selects or unselects all groups in a table.
Station
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-35

Station
Paging Group
Paging Group
502 Terminal Paging Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Assigns Primary DNs to Paging Group(s).
1. From the Program Menu click Advanced Configuration > Station > Page Group.
2. Enter a DN number in the Primary DN field.
... or select an existing record by clicking one of the following buttons:
· List select from a summary list of programmed DKTs on the right side of the screen.
· Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy. Enter a new DN(s) to assign existing
Paging Group settings.
3. Select the desired values. See descriptions below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Primary DN
Enter the Prime DN of the station to be assigned to Paging Groups. A station may
belong to more than one paging group.
Note
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the CIX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the CIX200, CIX 670 & CIX 670.
Page Group capacity: CIX100 4 Page Groups; CIX200, CIX670 Basic 6 Page
Groups; CIX670 Expanded 16 Page Groups
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
PG01~PG16
Check to assign the DN to this paging group. The number of Page Groups that can be
assigned are: 1~4 (CIX100); 1~8 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic); 1~16 (CIX670 Exp.)
Possible values: On or Off (default)
Note
Up to 120 stations may be assigned to a paging group in the CIX200, CIX 670.
All Page Group
Check to assign the DN to the All Page Group.
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the CIX100 and up to 120 stations in
a paging group in the CIX200, CIX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
All Emergency Page
Check to assign the DN to the All Emergency Page Group.
Group
You can have up to 72 stations in a paging group in the Strata CIX100 and up to 120
stations in a paging group in the CIX200, CIX 670.
Possible values: On or Off (default)
5-36
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Paging Group Table View
Paging Group Table View
Paging Group Table View enables you to view all paging groups and its members.
ä To access the Paging Group Table View
ä Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Paging Group Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-26 for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add, Select All and Unselect All, refer to "Hunt Group Table View" on
page 5-35
Note The Add button works a little different on this table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
the Add Now button.
Station
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-37

Station
210 Pickup Group
210 Pickup Group
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
The Call Pickup Group assignments specify which group numbers this station will participate when either the Group Call Pickup
or the Group Directed Call Pickup features are invoked. A user may be assigned to more than one group.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01~32
Click in the radio button to Indicate which Call Pickup Group(s) this stations is to
participate in. A station can be assigned to more than one group.
Possible values: check = On or unchecked = Off (default)
Note
01~05 are available for CIX100, 01~10 are available for CIX200, CIX670
Basic, and 01~32 are available for CIX670 Exp.
Pickup Group Table View
Pickup Group Table View enables you to view all Pickup groups and its members.
ä To access the Paging Group Table View
ä Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Pickup Group Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-26 for table functionality.
For functionality on Delete, Add, Select All and Unselect All, refer to "Hunt Group Table View" on
page 5-35.
Note The Add button works a little different on this table.
When you click Add, the Add dialog box displays, select the entry by clicking on it and then click
the Add Now button.
5-38
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Multiple Call Group
Multiple Call Group
To set up Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing you must have a Multiple Call (MC) Group set in Program 517.
You can register up to 25 calling members for every MC Group in Program 518. You can set each member
to be Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2. The Delayed Ring times are independently
adjustable (1~180 seconds) for each Multiple Call Group Member.
Important!
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs. See "Member Requirements" below.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Incoming Call to Multiple Call (MC) Group
The following can occur when calling members are set as Immediate, Delayed Ring 1, or Delayed Ring 2.
· If the members of a MC Group are assigned Immediate ring, the call is received at all destinations
immediately. In this case, each destination LCD displays the same incoming call information.
· If the MC Group destination (member) is assigned to Delayed Ring 1 or Delayed Ring 2, each
destination will start to ring when the delay time runs out. During the delay time the member PDN or
PhDN button will flash red but not ring.
Important!
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
· If some MC Group destinations are busy, incoming call rings only idle destinations. However, if the
camp-on feature is in effect, incoming calls will camp-on to busy destinations.
· Members can be assigned to multiple MC Groups.
MCPN Owner Privileges
When you assign members to an MC group, the member assigned to Index 1 in Program 518 is considered
the owner of the group. The owner of the group is the only member entitled to the following privileges:
· The owner is the only member in the group that can receive Automatic Call Back calls and Message
Waiting Indications.
· The ringing option for the owner is always set to Immediate ring.
· The owner can be a PhDN or PDN.
Member Requirements
The table below has details for members that can and cannot be in a group.
Statio
Members that can be in a Group
Members that cannot be in a Group
n
PDNs
Pilot DNs - ACD, MCP
PhDNs
CO Line Access Codes
Station Hunt Group Pilot DNs
Att.Consoles and BATI or DKTs assigned to the Attendant in programming.
Important!
·
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and PhDNs.
·
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt Group Pilot
Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
·
Attendant Consoles cannot be members of multiple call groups and cannot overflow to MC groups.
Assigning Attendant Consoles to MC groups will cause Attendant Consoles to malfunction. Do not set
Attendant Consoles to overflow to MC groups.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-39

Station
Multiple Call Group
Call Forward Activation
System and Station Call Forward can be set up for each Multiple Calling (MC) Group. The Call Forward
Remote Access Code is used to activate or de-activate Station Call Forward of MC Group. System Call
Forward is activated/deactivated using Strata eManager. The MC Group can also be set as the destination
of System on Station Call Forward.
517 Multiple Calling Group Assignment
Multiple Call/Delayed Ringing which enables you to delay ring to voice mail and auto attendants.
1. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click Create. A dialog box displays.
3. Enter a calling group index in the dialog box.
The calling group index can be 1~16 (CIX100), 1~32 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), and 1~64 (CIX670
Expanded).
4. Click Ok. Parameter 01 MC Group Pilot Number gets highlighted.
5. Enter the DN of the MC group. This number should not conflict with an existing telephone number.
6. Verify and change other parameters.
7. Click Submit. The group index displays on the left of the program name.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Multiple Call Group Number
Select a group number.
Possible values: 1~16 (CIX100), 1~32 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic) and 1~64
(CIX670 Exp.)
01 MC Group Pilot Number
Enter the Pilot Directory Number that should be assigned to the Multiple Call
Group. This can be any number 1~5 digits that does not conflict with numbers
in the current system Number Plan.
Possible values: 1~5 digits (default = no data)
02 Ring Delay 1 Timer
Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 12)
03 Ring Delay 2 Timer
Set the timer in seconds.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 24)
04 System Call Forward
Assign a System Call Forward template number to the multiple calling group.
Enter 0 or 1~32.
Possible values: 0 ~ 32 (default = 0)
05 Voice Mail ID
Enter the VM call forward ID digits for the Multiple Calling Group.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no data).
518 Multiple Calling Members Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 517
Use this program to assign members to a group.
1. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Multiple Calling Group.
2. Click the Member tab.
5-40
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Multiple Call Group
3. Select the Index Number, then enter the Member DN.
Important!
Immediate Destinations can only be PDNs (Digital and/or Standard Telephones) and
PhDNs.
Delay Destinations can be PDNs of Standard telephone circuits only and Voice Mail Hunt
Group Pilot Numbers (not Multiple DN Hunt Groups).
Note Each group can have up to 25 members. You can have up to 64 groups.
4. Submit is greyed out because the members are automatically submitted as they get added.
Note The buttons on this screen are dynamic. When you select an empty Index number, the Add button
displays. When you select and existing Index number, the Modify and Remove buttons display.
Modify enables you to edit, while Remove deletes the multiple ringing group index number.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Multiple Call Group Number
Multiple Call Group Number
CIX100, enter 1~16.
CIX200, CIX670 Basic enter 1~32.
CIX670 Expanded, enter 1~64.
01 MC Group Member Index
Select an index to add a new PDN, PhDN or Hunt Pilot number to this MC
Group.
Select an existing MC Group Member DN to Modify or Delete the member.
02 Member Type
Select Dialing Digits for all Member DNs.
Possible values: No Data or Dialing Digits (default = No Data)
03 Member DN
Select an index to a add a new member to this MC Group; or, select an
existing Member DN to Modify or Delete the member.
To add a Member DN, enter a PDN, PhDN or Hunt Group Pilot number that
exists in the system, then select which ringing option that should be assigned
to the member (Member DNs can be in multiple MC Groups).
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = No Data)
04 Ringing Options
Select either: Immediate, Delay 1 or Delay 2 ring.
Notes:
1.Immedate ring assignments will continue to ring when Delay 1 & 2 ring
Sta
assignments ring.
tion
2. Delay 1 ring assignments will continue to ring when Delay 2 ring
assignments ring.
3. Delay ring PDN and PhDN buttons will flash red and not ring immediately
after the MC Group is called; they will ring and flash green when their delay
ring timers expire.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-41

Station
516 Station Speed Dial
516 Station Speed Dial
Prerequisite Program: 200 page 5-1
Up to 100 pre-programmed Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits each) can be assigned to each station.
Speed Dial numbers are stored in "Bins" and each station accesses the Speed Dial numbers by entering the
Speed Dial Bin number from their respective stations. The following advanced Speed Dialing features are
available in Strata CIX.
· Speed Dial Bin Linking Whenever a Speed Dial number exceeds the 32-digit Speed Dial Bin memory
limitation, the digits exceeding the 32 digit limitation are automatically stored into the adjacent Speed
Dial Bin. The entire string is activated by using the primary Speed Dial Bin number.
Note Bin linking is automatic. Any previously programmed data in the "adjacent Speed Dial Bin" as
described above is overwritten. Furthermore, if a number exceeding the maximum allowable dial
digit length is overwritten with a new number which complies to the 32-digit restriction, the excess
digits recorded in the next Bin (from the previous entry) is treated as a unique Speed Dial record.
· Speed Dial Number Nesting A Speed Dial number can be nested into another Speed Dial number. For
example, if an international dialing prefix is used often, program the prefix in any Speed Dial Bin. Then
in the another Speed Dial Bin, program the first Bin number + the number to dial. When the second
Speed Dial Bin is activated, Strata CIX first retrieves and dials the international dialing prefix from the
first Bin location, then adds the numbers to dial.
1. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > Speed Dial. The Station Speed
Dial screen displays (shown right).
2. Enter Program 516 data.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Select the PDN assigned the speed dial number.
01 Speed Dial Bin
Enter the station speed dial bin number. A station can have up to 100 speed dial bins.
Possible values: 00~99 (default = no value)
Note
Adding bin numbers here will automatically increment the number of speed dial
bins available to the station in increments of 10 speed dial bins. The number of
speed dial bins available to the station can also be assigned and displayed in
Prg 200, 35 - Station SpDial Bins. Example: If bin number 50 is entered here,
50 speed dial bins will automatically be assigned to the station and will also be
displayed in Prg 200, 35.
5-42
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Station Speed Dial Table View
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
02 Number
This is the dialable number stored in the speed dial bin.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits, 0~9, *, # and Pauses (default = no value)
To enter pauses enter Px, where x equals 0~9 (seconds), which is the length of the
pause, 0=10 seconds.
Notes
· If the number being entered exceeds the 32 digits, the next speed dial location will
automatically be appended to create longer numbers.
· Also another speed dial bin can be nested within another bin for dialing common
numbers. If speed dial bin 100 has long distance access digits 1010321, these digits
can be nested in to other speed dial bins by using *100 as the first digits of the other
bins. Example putting *10017145563425 into speed dial bin 150 would cause
SD150 to dial the access digits plus the number 10132117145563425.
· If you are programming from the Telephone the digits * and # have a special
meaning when programming speed dial numbers. The # digit indicates the end of
entry and * is an escape character. To dial the digits * or # as part of the number;
enter ** or *#. To enter pauses enter *0~*9. The second digit represents the number
of seconds for the pause function.
03 Name
Enter the LCD Name that displays on LCD dial directories.
Possible values: Up to 8 characters (default = no value)
Station Speed Dial Table View
Station Speed Dial Table View shows the entire set up for all speed dial numbers.
ä To access the System Speed Dial Table View
ä Select Advanced Configuration > System > System Speed Dial Table View.
See "Table Views" on page 2-26 for table functionality.
Stat
PDN Table View
ion
This screen shows the entire list of available PDNs.
ä To access the Station Speed PDN Table View
Select Advanced Configuration > Station > PDN Table View.
Note See "Table Views" on page 2-26 for table functionality.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-43

Station
ISDN
ISDN
The following programs assign ISDN data to stations.
Program Number(s): 202 and 217
202 ISDN BRI Station
Prerequisite Program: 100 page 4-1
This command assigns ISDN BRI stations.
1. Complete the "ISDN Station Data Record Sheet" on page C-20.From the Program Menu, click
Advanced Configuration > Station > ISDN > Basic. The ISDN Basic Station Assignment screen
displays.
2. Enter a Primary DN for an existing record
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List view a summary list of programmed DN's.
· Create Assign a new Primary DN with custom BRI Station settings.
· Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
· Delete Enter a ISDN Primary DN to delete and click OK.
· Change DN Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Change DN to assign a new DN to the
ISDN BRI Station.
3. Set up ISDN BRI Station using the Program Detail table below.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Enter the PDN. When a required DN is not programmed, the DN is regarded as a new
station. The System assigns default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 PDN Equipment No.
Enter the BRI equipment number assigned to this PDN. This is the cabinet, slot, and
circuit number of the RBUU/RBUS or RBSU/RBSS interface PCB to which the PDN is,
or should be, assigned. Enter data as xxyyzz:
Example: If the PDN should be a assigned to a BDKU in cabinet 5, slot 2, circuit 3; enter
050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 ISDN Channel
Enter the ISDN Channel Group number.
Group
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic)1~128 (CIX670 Exp.)
(default = 1)
5-44
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 ISDN Protocol
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set in
the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat'l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat'l ISDN Nortel
Note
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
04 Type Connection
Select Point to point or Point to Multi-point connection type.
Possible values: Point to point (default) or Point to Multi-point
05 BRI Station COS
Select the BRI Station Class of Service assignments.
· Day1 COS
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
· Day2 COS
· Night COS
06 BRI Station DRL
Select the BRI Station Destination Restriction Level assignments.
· Day1 DRL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
· Day2 DRL
· Night DRL
07 BRI Station FRL
Select the BRI Station Facilities Restriction Level assignments.
· Day1 FRL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
· Day2 FRL
· Night FRL
08 LCR Group
Select the Least Cost Routing Group number to which this BRI Station belongs.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
09 BRI Station QPL
Select the BRI Station QPL assignments.
· Day1 QPL
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
· Day2 QPL
· Night QPL
10 Speech Capability
Bearer Capability Speech See Table 5-5 on page 48.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
11 3.1 KHz Audio
Bearer Capability 3.1kHzAudio See Table 5-5 on page 48.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
12 7 KHz Audio
Bearer Capability 7kHzAudio. See Table 5-5 on page 48.
Sta
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
tion
13 64Kbps
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 64kbps. See Table 5-5 on page 48.
Unrestricted
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
14 56Kbps
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 56kbps
Unrestricted
15 2 x 64Kbps
Bearer Capability unrestricted digital Information 2x64kbps
Unrestricted
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-45

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
16 B Channel
Select originating B Channel method.
Selection
Possible values:
· Exclusive (default) Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
· Preferred Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
· Any Channel Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
17 Idle B Channel
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Selection
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default)
· Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest to highest number of B-channel).
· Select Backward Cyclic (from highest to lowest number of B-channel).
· Select Forward Terminal for the lowest number B-channel (The Low-Low B-channel
selection).
· Select Backward Terminal for the highest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
18 Interdigit Timer 1
Select the Interdigit timer value, to time-out during dial tone.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 15)
19 Interdigit Timer 2
Interdigit timer value to time-out after the first digit is dialed.
Possible values: 1~180 (default = 5)
20 CESID
Enter the CESID value for 911 calls.
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
21 Number Voice Calls
Select the Number of Voice Calls Allowed. If a selection is not made, previously written
Allowed
data in this field is erased.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
Note
If One is selected, the other channel is reserved for Data.
22 Service Tone
Enable Service Tone Permission. Select Disable for modems and faxes.
Permission
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
23 TGAC Override
Enable TGAC Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
24 Change System
Enable System Speed Dial changing permission.
Speed
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
25 Network COS
Enter the Network COS value. If a selection is not made, previously written data in this
field is erased.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
26 DN2~32 DN8
Add a DN to this BRI Station. When a DN is entered into one of the seven available
fields, default data as defined in 217 ISDN Station Data is applied to the DNs. If a
selection is not made, any previously written data in this field is erased.
Possible values: Up to 5 ASCII characters (default = no value)
33 Auto OCA
Enable OCA to occur automatically when making a call to a busy station that allows calls
to be received.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
5-46
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
34 Originate OCA
Enable this station to make OCA calls to other stations.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
35 Station SpDial Bins
The number of station speed dial bins allocated to this station
Possible values: maximum=100
36 Call Forward Dial
When the handset is picked up the user will hear stutter dial tone if a call forward is
Tone
enabled
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
37 Dialing Digit
After the ISDN Extension has made a call it can be prevented from dialling any
Restriction
subsequent digits.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
38 MW/DND
Enable: When this station goes off hook, the station will receive stuttered dial tone when
it has a message waiting indication; and the station will receive a busy tone burst before
dial tone when in the DND mode.
Disable: This station will receive normal dial tone when it has a message waiting or
when it is in the DND mode.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
39 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this PDN should be assigned.
Possible values: 1 ~ 8 (default = 1)
40 Auto-Campon to
This feature allows automatic camp-on to a PDN, even when it is busy and called by a
PDN
CO line. If Automatic Camp-on to PDN is enabled, a call to a PDN can camp on even if
the CO line group has auto-camp on disabled in Program 304-17.
Possible values: Enable: Allow auto camp-on to PDN or Disable: No auto camp-on to
PDN
41 LCR PDN Code
Enter the number of digits that determine when to send the LCR PDN code. The PDN
code is registered in the LCR Modified Digits table.
Possible values: 0Three Digits or Four Digits (default = Three Digits)
42 Network Calling
Enter the CLID telephone number that should be sent for this station when making
Number
external calls through the Strata Net ISDN network (32 digits max.). When this station
makes outgoing calls through the StrataNet network, this number will be sent over the
Strata Net network to the terminating PSTN connected to the far-end node (Providing
this is allowed by the PSTN). This number will be displayed as the Caller ID number at
St
the terminating external telephone. This number is not sent to local PSTNs connected to
at
the node from which the call is originated; nor is it sent when making conventional Tie
ion
line calls that terminate on a PSTN at a far-end node.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no data)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-47

Station
ISDN
Table 5-5
BRI Bearer Capability of ISDN
Bellcore
Bearer Services
ETSI
TTC
Nat'l ISDN
Speech
X
X
X
3.1kHz Audio
X
X
X
7kHz Audio
X
X
Circuit Mode
64 kbps
X
X
X
Rate adaptation
Unrestricted Digital Information
from 56 kbps
X
2x64
X
X
5-48
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
ISDN
217 ISDN Station Data
Prerequisite Program: 202 page 5-44
Set ISDN Station parameters to define ISDN capabilities.
1. Complete the "ISDN Station Data Record Sheet" on page C-20.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Station > ISDN > Station Data. The ISDN
Individual Station Data Assignment screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter a Primary DN for an existing record
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List view a summary list of programmed Hunt Groups.
· Copy Enter a DN in the Primary DN field and click Copy to make a new DN assignment with BRI
Station settings copied from the DN entered in the Primary DN field.
4. Set up ISDN Station Data using the Program Detail table below.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Primary DN
Enter Primary DN.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
01 Station Name
Enter the name that should be displayed on telephone LCDs for this PDN. (Max. 8
characters with R1.0~R2.20, Max.16 characters with R2.21 and above.
Possible values: Up to 9 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Dial Method
Select the audible tone when dialing.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or No Tone
03 System Call Forward
Select the System Call Forward assignment for this station.
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)
04 CF Password
Protect the System Call Forward settings by creating a password.
Possible values: Up to 4 digits (default = no value)
05 Door Phone Override
Enable the Door Phone ringing indicator to override Do Not Disturb.
DND
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
06 Emerg Call Group
Select this station's emergency call group.
St
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
ation
07 COS Override Code
Enable Class of Service Override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
08 Display DN
Enter the DN to be displayed on the LCD.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-49

Station
Setup Wizards
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
09 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the voice mail box number that should answer calls when this PDN calls voice
mail; or, when this PDN is called and then forwards to voice mail (this number is
prefixed by codes in Program 579, 11~16).
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #, up to 10 characters (default = no value).
Note
This VMID code is sent to the voice mail device in SMDI packets or DTMF
tones on direct and forwarded calls to the PDN. See Program 580 for
SMDI or DTMF choice.
12 Name Display
Whether to put the user name in the list display.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
13 CPN Presentation to
Determine what is sent to an SBus extension from an incoming ISDN trunk
SBus
Possible values: DN, CPN or DN AND CPN (default = DN)
Setup Wizards
There are three Station setup wizards--PDN Range, Multiple DN, and VMID Range. Each of them are
described below.
PDN Range Setup Wizard
This wizard is a programming time saver that reduces the time it takes to create or change Primary
Directory Numbers (PDN) and assign them to phones. The wizard guides the user to create a range of
desired PDNs to be assigned to a range of available station ports.
1. Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Setup Wizard > PDN Range.
Review the instructions that display on the Wizard screen.
2. Click Start. The Primary DN Setup Wizard screen displays.
3. Select the appropriate radio buttons and enter the data in the other fields.
· Range of associated PDN equipment.
· Selection to overwrite the existing PDNs.
4. (Optional) Click Number Plan button to access Numbering Plan page.
5. (Optional) Click PDN Table View button to view existing PDN Table.
6. Press Start to create PDNs.
The screen containing the PDN assignments (shown right) displays.
Note The first available equipment number (card slot/circuit) is automatically used to create the first
PDN, etc.
5-50
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Setup Wizards
Multiple DN Assignment Wizard
Important!
·
To avoid conflicts on new installations, you should use this wizard immediately after establishing and
assigning Primary DNs on telephones, especially before you program key strips or hunt groups.
·
The wizard can be used to assign Multiple DNs to new stations when adding new station cards.
This wizard substantially reduces CIX installation time when you need multiple DN buttons on telephones.
Multiple DNs are required in most CIX installations.
The wizard automatically programs multiple buttons onto telephones to operate as PDN buttons on the
telephones. This wizard automatically groups the telephone's PDN button with the Phantom Directory
Number (PhDN) buttons so they all operate like PDNs on the telephone--this simulates Strata DK
multiple PDN operation. You will not have to set Call forward or VMID codes for the PhDNs since they
automatically assume the PDN Call Forward and VMID code assignments.
On these screens you need to specify how many button appearances should appear as PDNs on each
telephone or range of telephones (the number of buttons including the PDNs plus the PhDNs). You should
also specify the starting PhDN and Hunt Group number to be used to set up the multiple DN groups.
Important!
Make sure you know exactly how many multiple DNs should be on each telephone before
using this wizard. After running the Multiple DN wizard, deletions or additions to Multiple
DN assignments must be made manually, one-by-one, for each telephone PhDN button and
Multiple DN hunt group. The wizard does not support changing existing Multiple DN
assignments in this version of Strata eManager.
1. Click Advanced Configuration > Station > SetUp Wizard > Multiple DN. The Multiple DN Assignment
Wizard screen display.
2. Click Start. Strata eManager automatically assigns the:
· Appropriate number of PhDN buttons onto the telephone. These operate as PDN buttons on the
telephone. PhDNs are assigned in sequence starting with the first button above the PDN.
CAUTION!
If other buttons were installed in a PhDN location they will be overwritten.
· Appropriate telephone as the owner of the PhDN buttons, starting with the PhDN you specified.
· PDN of the telephone as the name of the PhDN buttons.
· PDN and appropriate PhDNs of the telephone to the appropriate Multiple DN Hunt group, starting
with Hunt group number you specified.
Stat
3. Based on your requirements, enter the necessary fields.
ion
Note The example on this screen shows that five buttons were entered. This assigns the PDN plus four
PhDNs on the telephone starting with Key 1~Key 5.
4. Click Start to generate the request. The screen will change.
Important!
·
This is a report that provides the Multiple DN assignments that will be sent to the CIX.
·
Ensure that this information is correct before you click Continue. You can change the assignments by
clicking Back.
5. Click Continue to generate results onto CIX database.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-51

Station
Setup Wizards
Note To modify these entries later, you will have to use the appropriate individual program assignments.
6. Review the configuration screen. This is how the multiple DNs are assigned in the CIX after the wizard
is done.
7. (Optional) To print the configuration results, click Print.
8. To exit, select a command from the Program pane.
VMID Range
This wizard reduces CIX programming time when you need to assign Voice Mail ID (VMID) codes. The
wizard will automatically assign specified VMID codes for a range of Primary DNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot
DNs.
Specify the range of PDNs, PhDNs, or Pilot DNs that should have VMID code assignments. Then select
the VMID code assignment method.
The three code assignment methods are to assign the VMID to:
· Be the same number as the appropriate DN (PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN).
· Start at specific number and increment by one for each consecutive DN.
· Be the same number for all DNs.
In addition to the above assignments, specific digits including * and # can be added to the front and/or back
of each VMID. This is not for Stratagy codes 91, 92, etc., they are set in Program 579.
You can program a range of VMID codes for PDNs, PhDNs and/or Pilot DNs.
5-52
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Station
Setup Wizards
1. Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Setup Wizard > VMID Range.
2. The VMID Range Setup Wizard displays.
3. Click Start. The input screen of the VMID Range Setup Wizard displays.
4. Select the type of VMID that should be assigned to the PDN, PhDN or Pilot DN. Then select the
assignment method and the digits, if any, to be added to front and/or end of each VMID.
Note DN range is supported. VMID prefix and/or suffix are supported.
5. Click Start to submit the settings to the CIX database.
The result requested will display on the screen.
6. (Optional) Click Print to save a hard copy of the VMID assignment.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
5-53

This page is intentionally left blank.

Trunks
6
This chapter provides trunk programming information for Strata CIX.
304 Incoming Line Group
Program Number(s): 304
Incoming Line Groups (ILG) is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private
line groups for incoming service.
1. Complete the Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > ILG. The Trunk ILG screen
displays.
3. Enter an ILG number
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List select from the summary list of ILGs on the right side of the screen.
· Create Assign a new ILG with default settings.
· Copy Enter an ILG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new ILG assignment with
settings copied from the ILG entered in Group Number.
· Delete Delete an ILG.
· Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
4. Enter Program 304 data.
5. Click Submit.
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-1

Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group
304 Incoming Line Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This assignment is used to configure ILGs only, OLGs are configured in the Outgoing Line Group
Assignment 306. The same line can be placed in an ILG and OLG.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Group Number
Enter the group number of the line group that should be configured.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 for (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~128 for (CIX670 Exp) (default = no value)
01 Group Type
Select the ILG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Service Type
Select CO Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: DID or DIT (default)
04 Private Service Type
Select the Tie Trunk Service Type. This field is required when Trunk Type is set to
Tie.
Possible values: Standard (default) or Strata Net
05 GCO Key Number
Select ILG GCO Key Group for DIT mode (see Trunk Type above). The same GCO
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Note: If CO keys are assigned, in PRG205, to ring lines in this group, GCO
assignments will be ignored and will not ring
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = 0)
06 Pooled Key Number
Select ILG Pooled Line Key Group for DIT mode. The same Pooled Line Group
cannot belong to different ILGs.
Note: If GCO or CO keys are assigned to ring lines in this group, Pooled key
assignments will be ignored and will not ring.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = 0)
07 COS
Select Class of Service Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
08 DRL
Select Destination Restriction Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
09 FRL
Select Facilities Restriction Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL
Select Queuing Priority Level Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 DID Digits
Select number of DID digits received from CO.
Possible values: 0~7 (default = 0)
6-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
12 Speech/3.1 KHz
Select Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
13 Ringing Timer Delay 1
Select time to ring the Delay 1 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 12)
14 Ringing Timer Delay 2
Select time to ring the Delay 2 destination.
Possible values: 1~60 sec. (default = 24)
15 Interdigit 1 Timer
Select Interdigit 1 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 15)
16 Interdigit 2 Timer
Select Interdigit 2 timer value.
Possible values: 1~180 sec. (default = 5)
17 Auto Camp-on
Enable Automatic Camp-on.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable.
18 Calling Number ID
Select whether the Calling Number Identification is provided by the User side or
Network side.
Possible values: User Provided (default) or Network Provided
19 Intercept
Enable Intercept. A call is transferred to a special destination called intercept
position when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID, DIT or
DISA. Intercept is also activated when the destination is determined, but the call
cannot be terminated due to a defect or an incorrect number. If the system has a
simplified attendant console, the Attendant Console is usually specified to terminate
the call. This function ensures termination of a trunk line call.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 Send Dial Tone
Whether or not to send dial tone to the originating system (for Tie trunks).
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
21 TGAC Override
Enable Trunk Group Access Code (TGAC) override.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
22 Network COS
Enter the COS to be used in Traveling Classmark for StrataNet.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
23 LCR Group
Enter the LCR Group number. Calls from this ILG cannot tandem if this field is not
entered.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
24 Change COS Override
Enable authority to change COS Override Code.
Code
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 Register Speed Dial
Enable authority to create system speed dial codes.
Codes
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Trun
26 Originator Invoke OCA
Enable authority for the originator of a call to invoke OCA when encountering a
ks
busy station.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-3

Trunks
304 Incoming Line Group
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
27 Senderized Tone Mode
Send DTMF tones as a complete number rather than digit-by-digit.
Possible values: Dial Tone (default), Entry Tone or Silence
28 Emergency Call Group
Used to enable E911 calling across a Strata Net network. The Strata Net ILG is
assigned to an Emergency Call Group in the same way a station is in Program 200
FB17. Without this assignment, the call will not attempt to complete to one of the
trunks in the Emergency Group and will result in an abandoned call. See Program
550 Enhanced 911 Emergency Call Group Assignment.
Possible values: 1~8 (default = 1)
29 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values:
1~8.
30 Call-By-Call Cause
Enter the condition for which incoming ISDN calls disconnect when programmed for
Call-By-Call (min./max.).
User Busy: Cause 17
Circuit/Channel congestion: Cause 34
6-4
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
306 Outgoing Line Groups
Prerequisite Program: None
OLG is a line selection feature which enables the use of external trunk or private line groups for outgoing
service. Assign and configure up to 128 OLGs (the same line can be placed in an OLG and an ILG).
1. Complete the OLG Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > OLG. The Trunk Outgoing Line
Groups (OLG) screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter an OLG number in the Group Number field for an existing record
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List choose a summary list of programmed OLGs on the right side of the screen.
· Create Assign a new OLG with default settings.
· Copy Enter an OLG in the Group Number field and click Copy to make a new OLG assignment
with settings copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
· Delete Delete an OLG.
· Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
4. Enter Program 306 data.
5. Enter Program 53cxpg_09.pdf">1. See "Destination Restriction Guide Page" on page 9-10 for details.
6. Enter Program 51cxpg_09.pdf">4. See "514 SMDR for OLG Assignment" on page 9-42 for details.
7. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Group Number
Enter the OLG Group number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = no value)
01 Group Type
Select the OLG Type.
Possible values: Analog (default) or ISDN
02 Trunk Type
Select the Trunk Type.
Possible values: CO (default) or Tie
03 Private Service Type
TIE Trunk Service Type.
Possible values: Standard (default) or Strata Net
04 GCO Key1 Number
Select the first GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 0~128 (CIX670 Exp)
(default = 0)
06 Pooled Key1 Number
Select first Pooled Line Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 0~128 (CIX670 Exp)
(default = 0)
Tr
07 Pooled Key2 Number
Select second Pooled Line Key Group number.
unk
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 0~128 (CIX670 Exp)
s
(default = 0)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-5

Trunks
306 Outgoing Line Groups
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
08 COS
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
09 FRL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
10 QPL
Select Day 1, Day 2 and Night Values.
Possible values: 1~16 (default = 1)
11 Speech/3.1 KHz
Bearer Capability 3.1 KHz Audio or Speech.
Possible values: Audio (default) or Speech
12 MOH Source
Select MOH Source.
Possible values: Silence, External1~15, Internal (default)
13 Account Code
Whether or not Forced Account Code is applied when using this OLG.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
14 Destination
Whether or not Destination Restriction is applied when using this OLG.
Restriction
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
15 Credit Cart Calling
Whether or not to enable Credit Card Calling using this OLG.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
16 Send CESID
Whether or not E911 CESID information is sent (enabled) on this OLG.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
17 Strata Net Sending
Digit sending mode for Strata Net only.
Type
Possible values: Cut Through or Senderized (default = Cut through)
18 Network COS
Select Network COS number.
Possible values: 1~32 (default = 1)
19 Recall on AC15
This enables or disables the sending and detection of a recall signal on AC15 TIE
lines. (This applies to the PACU PCBs only.)
Possible values: Enable of Disable (default = Disable)
6-6
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
300 Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100cxpg_04.pdf"> page 4-1
Assigns an analog or T1 trunk (line) and its parameters to the system. Click on each tab to navigate through
the programs. The trunks assigned to the equipment display on the left of the screen. The first column
displays the trunks used and the second column displays the equipment. You can also sort based on trunks
and equipment.
Important!
You must have Internet Explorer (IE) 6.0 on your PC for the sort to work correctly.
1. Complete the Trunk Assignment Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > Assignment. The Trunk Basic
Assignments screen displays.
3. Enter a Trunk Number
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List choose from the summary list of programmed Trunks on the right side of the screen.
· Create Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
· Copy Enter an Trunk Number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with settings
copied from the OLG entered in Group Number.
· Delete Delete an Trunk.
· Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
4. Enter Trunk Assignment Data.
5. Click Submit.
6. Click the Go Timer/DIT link to view Programs 308 and 310 (see "308 Trunk Timer" on page 6-11 for
details).
Note
When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or M3.10 MK024 and later systems) set Release
Supervision and Answer Supervision to Enabled.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line Number
Enter the Line Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (CIX100), 1~96 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~264 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-7

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Line Equipment No.
Enter the line equipment number as xxyyzz. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If the trunk should be connected to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX = cabinet 01~07
YY = slot 01~10
ZZ = analog trunk circuit 01~08
or
ZZ = T1channel 01~24.

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
02 Incoming Line Group
Assign the trunk to an Incoming Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = 0)
03 Outgoing Line Group
Assign the trunk to an Outgoing Line Group. Two-way trunks need to be members of
one incoming and one outgoing line group.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = 0)
04 Dial Mode
Enter the Dial Mode.
Possible values: DP 10PPS, DP 20PPS or DTMF (default)
· DP 10 PPS = Rotary Dial, 10 PPS
· DP 20 PPS = Rotary Dial, 20 PPS
05 Signaling
Enter the signalling type.
Possible values: DID, Loop (default), Ground, Tie, LP (Japan), SR (Japan) or ACU
(UK)
06 Start Method
Enter the Start Method. This setting defines the start protocol method used between
the PSTN and this trunk. For DID/Tie trunks.
Possible values: Immediate Start (default), Timing Start or Wink Start
6-8
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
07 Release Supervision
Enable Release Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
Note
When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or M3.10
MK024 and later systems) set this to Enabled.
08 Answer Supervision
Enable Answer Supervision from the CO.
Possible values: Received or Not Received (default)
Note
When assigning CAMA trunks for E911 (R2.22 MH232 and later, or M3.10
MK024 and later systems) set this to Enabled.
09 Trunk Name
Enter the trunk name.
Possible values: Up to 14 ASCII characters (default = no value)
10 External Ring Repeat
This option determines what ring signal is sent to telephones when a line rings the
telephone. Select Supplied (CO Ring Repeat) to use the ring signal supplied by the
CO or Centrex line. Select Not Supplied (CIX Ring) to use the standard ring signal
supplied by the CIX.
Important! Ring Not Supplied must be used on all DISA lines for proper ringing
operation.
Possible values: Supplied (CO Repeat) - (default) or Not Supplied (CIX Ring)
11 DTMF Back Tone
Select DTMF Back Tone type.
Possible values: Padded, DTMF Tone (default) or No Tone
12 Hunt Order
The order, within the trunks OLG, in which the trunk will be seized for outgoing calls.
Enter 1 for the first trunk sized, 2=next trunk, etc. Enter 999 for the last trunk to be
seized.
Possible values: 1~264 or Last One (default = 1)
13 Immediate Cut-Through
This option should be enabled on a line only if the talk-path must be established
immediately after seizing a selected outgoing line.
Example, a line connected to a Central Office Ringdown circuit.
Possible values: Enable, Disable (default)
CAUTION!
This option will bypass Destination Restriction and E911 digit
analysis. Do not enable this option on a line where these
functions are required.
This option is available only on ground and loop, analog or T1 circuits. It should not
be enabled for Tie, DID, ISDN and Strata Net lines.
14 CO Line Guard Time
The interval between the release of a CO line and its eligibility to be seized again.
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-9

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
313 Caller ID
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
This program assigns Caller ID circuits to the CO Line to which the circuit is connected. The ANI, DNIS,
DID formats for TI and analog DID CO Lines are also defined.
1. Complete the Caller ID Assignment Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > Assignment, the click the Caller ID
tab. The Trunk Caller ID Assignments screen displays.
3. Enter a Trunk Number in Trunk Index for an existing record or click one of the following buttons:
· List choose from the summary list of programmed trunks on the right side of the screen.
· Copy Enter the Trunk Number in the Trunk Number field and click Copy to make new Caller ID
trunk numbers.
4. Enter Caller ID Assignment data.
5. Get Default - restores all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Trunk Number
Enter the Trunk Number.
Possible values: 1~64 (CIX100), 1~96 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~264 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Signaling Method
Specify the format for the interface being used.
Possible values: Nothing (default), ANI/DNIS-MCI, ANI/DNIS-Sprint or CLASS
(Caller ID)
02 Signaling Contents
Specify the contents of the ANI/DNIS format.
Possible values: ANI and DNIS, ANI only, DNIS only or DID only (default = no
value).
03 CLASS Equipment No.
If the CLASS type is chosen, the trunk must be assigned to a Caller ID circuit. Enter
the RCIU/RCIS equipment number as xxyyzz.
Notes
· CLASS equipment numbers are required when assigning a trunk to a RCIU/
RCIS circuit.
· It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing caller ID circuit
to trunk assignments. Example: If the trunk should be connected to a caller ID
circuit (RCIU/RCIS) in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3, enter 050203.
6-10
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
308 Trunk Timer
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
These commands assign Trunk timers.
1. Complete the Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Trunk > Assignment, then click the Timer tab. The Trunk Timer and
DIT Assignments screen displays.
3. Enter Trunk equipment number field. Enter Program 308 data.
· List choose from the summary list of programmed trunks timers on the right side of the screen.
· Copy to copy to trunk timer ports.
· Get Default - restores data to factory settings.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line No.
Enter the trunk equipment number.
Note
Equipment numbers are required when assigning a new trunk to the system. It
can also be used to display the equipment location of existing trunks.
01 Auto Release
The Automatic Release timing: Select Disable if the CO does not send the automatic
release signal on the loop start line. If the CO does send auto the release signal, also
none as Calling Party Control, set the detect duration time to 95ms or 450 ms depending
how long the CO opens the loop to disconnect the line.
Possible values: Disable, Detect 95ms or Detect 450ms (default)
02 Short Flash
Select Short Flash Time
Possible values: 0~15, where 1 = 100msec. (default = 5, which is .5 seconds)
0 = no flash, 1 = .1 sec., 2 = .2 sec. 15=1.5 sec. 5 is the most
common duration of a hook flash signal
When a telephone initiates the short flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the short Flash feature button or access code #450) the duration of a short flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to hook flash a centrex line.
The short flash range is 0 to 1.5 seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds.
03 Long Flash
Select Long Flash Time.
Possible values: 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30, where 5 = .5 seconds. (default = 5)
When a telephone initiates the long flash signal to the CO line it is connected to (using
the Long Flash feature button or access code #451) the duration of a long flash is
determined by this command. Normally this signal is used to disconnect the line. The
long flash range is 0 to 3 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. Possible values: 0=no
flash, 5=.5 sec., 10=1sec. 15=1.5 sec., 20=2 sec., 25=2.5 sec., 30=3 sec.
04 Pause after Flash
Pause time after flash: After a flash signal is sent to a CO line, this timer determines
when the line will start to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0~5, 0 = immediately sent, and 1sec.delay to 5sec.delay
(default = 1 second delay before sending digits)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-11

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
05 Response Timer
The response timer is for analog DID/TIE lines that have the "start method" set for
"Timing" in Prg300-06. After a line is seized this timer determines when the line will start
to send the dialed digits to the other end.
Possible values: 0=immediatly sent, and 50msec.delay to 500msec.delay
(default = 500mseconds delay before sending digits)
06 Call Abandon Timer
The interval after which the CIX stops sending ring tone to stations when an incoming
call is abandoned (caller hangs up before the call is answered).
Possible values: 6 Seconds or 8 Seconds (default)
6-12
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
310 DIT Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 300 page 6-7
This program assigns DIT Number Analysis Table for DIT trunks. DIT trunks are ground and loop start
trunks.
1. Complete the Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Trunk > Assignment, then click the DIT tab. The DIT Assignments
screen displays.
3. Enter Trunk equipment number field. Enter Program 310 data.
· List to view a summary list of programmed Trunks timers.
· Copy to copy to trunk timer ports.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Line No.
Enter the trunk equipment number. Equipment numbers are required when
assigning a new trunk to the system. It can also be used to display the equipment
location of existing trunks.
Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2, circuit 3,
enter 050203.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX = cabinet 01~07
YY = slot 01~10
ZZ = analog trunk circuit 01~08 or T1channel 01~24.

Example: If a line should be assigned to an RCOU in cabinet shelf 5, slot 2,
circuit 3, enter 050203.
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-13

Trunks
300 Trunk Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Day1 Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
02 Day2 Destination Type
Possible values: : No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem, or Night
03 Night Destination Type
Bell
· No Data no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
· Dialing Digits assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the "Destination Digits" assignment
· DSIA assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
· Modem assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
· Night Bell Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec. close / 3-
sec. open)
Day1 Destination Digits
Enter Destination, Directory Number or Access Codes for each, only if Dialing Digits
Day2 Destination Digits
is selected as Destination Type.
Night Destination Digits
· If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type, enter the Directory Number that the line
should ring.If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is
the external Page group number.
· If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new page access
code as the leading digits.
· Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route
incoming calls back out to a public or private network number.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
04 MOH Source
Select the Music On Hold source for the line. Quiet Tone means no music on hold
for the selected line.
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External1~15, Internal (default)
6-14
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
309 Direct Inward Dialing
This command assigns DID number analysis tables to ILGs.
1. Complete the DID Assignment Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > DID. The Trunk DID Assignments
screen will display.
3. Select an ILG Number.
4. Enter a DID Number in the 01 DID Number field or click one of the following buttons:
· List choose from the list of programmed DIDs on the right side of the screen.
· Create Make a new DID assignment using default settings.
· Copy Enter a DID Number in 01 DID Number and click Copy to make a new DID assignment
with settings copied from the DID Number entered.
· Delete Delete a DID.
· Get Default - restores data to factory defaults
5. Enter DID Assignment data.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ILG Group Number
Select the ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~128 (CIX670 Exp)
(default = no value)
01 DID Number
Enter a DID number.
Possible values: 1~7 digits may include wild card "?" where "?" = 0~9 (default = no
value).
02 MOH Source
Set Music On Hold source for the DID number. Quiet tone means no music on hold for
the selected DID number.
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External 1~15 or Internal (default)
03 GCO Key Group
Enter GCO Key Group Number that should ring for this line group.
Note: If CO Key or Dialing Digits are assigned as a ringing destination this assignment
will be ignored and will not ring.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 0~128 (CIX670 Exp)
(default = 0)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-15

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Pool Key Group
If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO or a Pooled line key, enter the
Destination type that should ring:
No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in
the 'Destination Digits' assignment.
DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to the
caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX processor.
Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open).
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 0~128 (CIX670 Exp)
(default = 0)
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
If this line group is not assigned to ring a CO, GCO or a Pooled line key, enter the
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
Destination type that should ring:
07 Audio Night Dst Type
No Data - no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
Dialing Digits - assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code defined in
the 'Destination Digits' assignment.
DISA - assigns the line to ring in as a DISA call - DISA dial tone will be returned to the
caller.
Modem - assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX processor.
Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
Night Bell - Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open).
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
Audio Day1 Destination
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Audio Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Audio Night Destination
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
Select the Destination Type for data calls
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night Bell
10 Data Night Dst Type
Data Day1 Destination
Enter the Destination Directory Number or Access Code.
Data Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Data Night Destination
If Dialing Digits is the Destination Type enter the Directory Number that the line should
ring. If the line should ring over external page, enter #31xx, where xx is the external
Page group number. If the default page access code #31 was changed, use the new
page access code as the leading digits.
Line access codes and network routing numbers can also be entered to route incoming
calls back out to a public or private network number.
6-16
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
309 Direct Inward Dialing
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
11 DNIS VMID Code
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
Note
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01. This
code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code set in
Program 309, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed; therefore, if
using Program 309, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN's mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets direct and forwarded DID\DNIS
calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DNIS Name
Enter DNIS name. DNIS names can be assigned from eManager (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
VMID
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9 (seconds),
up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly to
voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail before it is
answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that forwards
to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the forwarding DN's mail
box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if the
CIX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
16 Tenant Number
Enter the Tenant number to which this DID number should be assigned.
Possible values:
1(default)~8.
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-17

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
318 DID Intercept Assignments
Prerequisite Program: 304 page 6-2
This command assigns the DID Routing table when DID numbers are undefined or not received.
1. Complete the DID Intercept Assignment Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > DID Intercept.The DID Intercept
Assignments screen displays.
3. Enter an ILG Number
... or choose from the list of programmed ILGs on the right side of the screen.
4. Enter DID Type in the 01 Type field.
5. Enter DID Intercept Assignment data.
6. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
7. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ILG Number
Enter ILG number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp), (default = no value
01 Type
No DID, set destination that should ring when the DID number received does not
match DID numbers in this group's DID table.
Not Determined, set the destination that should ring when the normal programmed
ringing destination is disconnected.
Possible values: No DID (default) or Not Determined
02 MOH Source
Select Music On Hold
Possible values: Quiet Tone, External 1~15 or Internal (default)
03 Group CO Destination
GCO Key Group number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp), (default = 0)
04 Pooled Line Group
POOL Line Key Group Number.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp), (default = 0)
05 Audio Day1 Dst Type
Select the Audio/Speech call Day1 destination type.
06 Audio Day2 Dst Type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
07 Audio Night Dst Type
Bell
· No Data no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
· Dialing Digits assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the "Destination Digits" assignment
· DSIA assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
· Modem assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
· Night Bell Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec.close/3-
sec.open)
6-18
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Audio Day1 Dst. DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
Audio Day2 Dst DN
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Audio Night Dst DN
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
08 Data Day1 Dst Type
Select the data call Day1 destination type
09 Data Day2 Dst Type
Possible values: No Data (default), Dialing Digits, DISA, Built-in Modem or Night
10 Data Night Dst Type
Bell
· No Data no destination will ring when the line rings into the system.
· Dialing Digits assigns the line to ring the directory number or access code
defined in the "Destination Digits" assignment
· DSIA assigns the line to ring in as a DSIA call. DSIA dial tone will be returned
to the caller.
· Modem assigns the line to ring the remote maintenance modem on the CIX
processor. Used to call into the system with an eManager PC and modem.
· Night Bell Assigns the line to cause the night relay to pulse (one-sec. close / 3-
sec. open)
Data Day1 Dst DN
Enter the Destination Directory Number. Destination DN is only required if the
Data Day2 Dst DN
destination type is "Dialing Digits"
Data Night Dst DN
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
11 DID/DNIS No. VMID
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value).
Note
This code is only sent if using SMDI VM integration in Program 580, 01.
This code will be replaced, after voice mail answers, by the DTMF code set
in Program 318, 15 DID/DNIS DTMF VMID code - if programmed;
therefore, if using Program 318, 15 code, this VMID code is not necessary.
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, this mail box number of the DID/DNIS number, or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This Voice Mail box number is added to SMDI packets of direct and forwarded
DID\DNIS calls to voice mail as explained above.
12 DID/DNIS Name
Enter DNIS Name. DNIS names can be assigned from eManager (not from
programming phones).
Possible values: Up to 16 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-19

Trunks
318 DID Intercept Assignments
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 DID/DNIS No. DTMF
Enter the VM mail box number which should answer calls for this DID/DNIS number.
VMID
Possible values: Digits 0~9, * and #. For a pause enter Px, where x=0~9
(seconds), up to 10 characters (default = no value).
This mail box number will be sent to voice mail on a DID/DNIS call that rings directly
to voice mail; and, on a direct DID/DNIS call to a DN that forwards to voice mail
before it is answered by the DN.
If a DID/DNIS call is answered by a station and then transferred to a DN that
forwards to voice mail, the mail box number of the DID/DNIS number or the
forwarding DN's mail box number will be sent to voice mail per Program 579, 01.
If this VMID code is not set, direct DID/DNIS calls will go to the VM general greeting
and DID/DNIS calls that forward from a DN to VM will go to the DN's VMID mail box.
This voice mail box number is sent to the VM port, as DTMF digits, after the VM port
answers a DID/DNIS call as explained above. These digits are sent to the VM port if
the CIX is set for SMDI or DTMF integration in Program 580, 01.
6-20
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
Service
Service
Program Number(s): 311 and 319
These commands assign Assigns Direct Inward System Access (DISA) properties.
1. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > Service. The Trunk Services screen
displays.
2. Enter Program 311 data.
3. Enter Program 319 data.
4. Click Submit.
311 DISA Security Code
Prerequisite Program: None
Assigns DISA parameters.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 DISA Enabled
Enable DISA security code.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
02 DISA Code
Enter DISA security code. Only required if DISA Security Code is marked as
necessary.
Possible values: Up to 15 digits (default = no value)
03 Response Timer
Choose the time, in seconds, the CIX will wait before answering an incoming DISA
call
Possible values: 0~30 (default = 5)
04 Idle Timer
Choose the time, in seconds, the CIX will wait for the first DTMF tones after
answering a DISA call.
Possible values: 0~60 (default = 10)
05 Tie Line Access
Enable this feature to allow DISA callers to access Tie lines when they call into the
system.
Possible values:
Enable or Disable (default)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-21

Trunks
315 T1 Trunk Card
319 Intercept Treatment
Prerequisite Program: None
This command assigns Intercept positions for Strata CIX Day/Night schedules. Intercept positions are used
when the destination of a trunk line call is not determined with DID or DIT.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Tenant Number
Select the Tenant number for which the Intercept Destinations should be
assigned.
Possible values:
1~8.
01 Day1 Destination Type
Select Destination Type for each.
02 Day2 Destination Type
Possible values: None (default), Dialing Digits or Night Bell
03 Night Destination Type
Day1 Destination
Enter Destination for each.
Day2 Destination
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
Night Destination
· To intercept with a DN use 0~99999
· To intercept with a Network DN use 1~32
· To intercept with Dial Digits Paging 1~16
315 T1 Trunk Card
Prerequisite Program: 100cxpg_04.pdf"> page 4-1
This command assigns T1 Trunk Card Data to the system.
1. Complete the Trunk Timer/DIT Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > T1. The T1 Trunk Card Data
Assignment screen displays.
3. Enter T1 card location in Shelf/Slot field (xxyy). The selected slot requires a DTU Card.
· xx = Cabinet 01~07
· yy = Slot 01~10
... or click the following buttons:
· List choose from the list of programmed Trunks on the right side of the screen.
· Copy to T1 trunk equipment.
· Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
4. Enter values for Program 315.
6-22
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
315 T1 Trunk Card
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
T1 Equipment
Enter the RDTU PCB equipment location.
Location
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX = cabinet 01~07
YY = slot 01~10
ZZ = analog trunk circuit 01~08 or ZZ=T1channel 01~24.

Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: 01 ~ 04 for each cabinet
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
01 Coding Format
Select the Coding Format.
Possible values: None, PZC, B8ZS (default) or ZCS
02 Frame Format
Select the Frame Format.
Possible values: SF Mode or ESF Mode (default)
04 Receive PAD
Select the Receive PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
05 Send PAD
Select the Send PAD values.
Possible values: None, Plus 6 dB, Plus 3 dB, Zero dB (default), Minus 3 dB, Minus
6 dB, Minus 9 dB, Minus 12 dB or Minus 15 dB
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-23

Trunks
DID/DNIS Table View
DID/DNIS Table View
This screen provides the DID/DNIS Table View on the DID command page.
Important!
To avoid any errors, you must first set the digit length under Advanced Configuration >
Trunk > ILG.
ä To access DID/DNIS table view
ä Click Trunk > DID/DNIS Table View
... or use Program 309.
See cxpg_02.pdf">"Table Views" on page 2-26 for table functionality.
Note You can navigate this table using the ILG and the DID/DNIS which are the first and second drop-
downs between the Previous and Next buttons.
6-24
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
ISDN
The following program enables set up for ISDN related system settings.
317 ISDN BRI Trunk
Prerequisite Program: 100cxpg_04.pdf"> page 4-1
1. This command assigns ISDN BRI Trunks.
1. Complete the ISDN BRI Station Record Sheets9. From the Program Menu, click Advanced
Configuration > Trunk > ISDN > BRI.
2. Enter Channel Group number
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List choose from a list of programmed Trunks on the right side of the screen.
· Create Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
· Copy Enter a Channel Group number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with
settings copied from the Channel Group you entered.
· Delete Delete an Trunk.
· Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
3. Enter data.
4. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Enter the BRI channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = no value)
01 Equipment Number
Enter the equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN BRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Example: If the RBUU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301 for circuit 1.
Possible values: xx = Cabinet 01~07; yy = Slot 01~10; zz = Circuit 01~08 or 01~24
(CIX670)
xx = Cabinet 01; yy = Slot 01~08; zz = Circuit 01~04 (CIX100)
(default = no value).
Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-25

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
02 Protocol
Select the ISDN protocol. Only Bearer capabilities specified by the protocol can be
entered in this field. The Initial value for ISDN Protocol corresponds to information set
in the hardware level.
Possible values: Nat'l ISDN (default), ETSI, TTC or Nat'l ISDN Nortel
National ISDN = North America, ETSI = England and TTC = Japan.
03 ILG
ILG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being received.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = no value).
04 OLG
OLG assignments must be made for basic ISDNs to process the calls being
originated.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = no value).
06 Bearer Svc - Speech
Enable speech capability. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table" on page 28.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1 KHz
Enable 3.1 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table" on page 28.
Audio
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
08 Bearer Svc - 7 KHz
Enable 7 KHz audio capability. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table" on page 28.
Audio
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
09 Bearer Svc -
Enable one of the unrestricted capabilities. See Table 6-1, "Bearer Capability Table"
Unrestricted 64K
on page 28.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable bearer capabilities for the channel
10 Bearer Svc -
group.
Unrestricted 56K
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
11 Bearer Svc -
Unrestricted 2x64K
12 Outgoing B Ch Select
Select originating B Channel method.
Possible values:
· Explicit Channel is indicated, and no alternative is acceptable.
· Preferred (default) Channel is indicated, and any alternative is acceptable.
· Any Channel Channel is indicated, and any channel is acceptable.
13 B Ch Selection
Choose Idle B Channel selection method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or Backward
Terminal (default = Backward Terminal)
· Select Forward Cyclic (from lowest number to highest number of B-channel).
· Select Backward Cyclic (from highest number to lowest number of B-channel).
· Select Forward Terminal for the lowest numbered B-channel.
Select Backward Terminal for the oldest number B-channel. (The High-High B-
channel selection)
14 Initialize Type
Enter the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) type of initialization.
Possible values: User Entry (Auto SPID On), User Entry (Auto SPID Off), Auto SPID
or None (default)
6-26
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
15 Initialization Display
Enter the text to be displayed for SPID Initialization.
Possible values: Up to 4 ASCII characters (default = User)
16 SPID #1
Enter the SPID value. These fields are required if you selected National ISDN in
Protocol. When no data is entered, any previously entered information is overwritten.
17 SPID #2
Possible values: Up to 20 ASCII characters (default = No Value)
18 T-Wait Timer
Enable the T-Wait Timer. This field is needed if you selected National ISDN in Protocol
above. This timer, used along with the SPID, assigns random initializing SPID times to
prevent BRI interfaces from re-initialize at the same time after a reset or power
outage.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
19 Voice Calls
Select the number of simultaneous voice (speech) calls that can exist at the same
time on this interface.
Possible values: One or Two (default)
20 Trunk Subscriber 1
Enter the telephone number for subscriber 1. Telephone number should be consistent
with D channel data. If no data is entered in this field any previously programmed
information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
21 Trunk Subscriber 2
Enter the telephone number for subscriber number 2. If no data is entered in this field
any previously programmed information is lost.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
22 Layer 1 Short Break
If layer 1 is interrupted for a short period of time CIX will ignore it
Tolerant
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Enable)
23 TEI assignment
TEI assignment for ISDN CO Trunk. Leave in default
Possible values: TEI FIXED, SINGLE TEI or 3:TWO TEI (default)
24 Malicious Call ID
Enable - to be allow Malicious Call ID to be sent by this terminal.
Disable - to not allow Malicious Call ID to be sent on this terminal.(also see Program
302-31)
Note: MCID supplementary service must be provided by PSTN for this feature to
operate.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-27

Trunks
ISDN
Table 6-1
Bearer Capability Table
Bellcore
Bearer Services
ETSI
TTC
National ISDN
Speech
X
X
X
3.1 KHz
X
X
X
7 KHz
X
X
64 Kbps
X
X
X
Circuit Mode
Rate adaptation
X
Unrestricted
from 56 Kbps
Digital
Information
2x64 Kbps
X
X
6-28
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
302 Strata Net (PRI) and Strata Net IP (QSIG)
Prerequisite Program: 100cxpg_04.pdf"> page 4-1
The PRI (RPTU, BPTU) and Strata Net IP (BIPU-Q) interface cards need to have a number of assignments
for defining its operation. These include assigning which channels are available for use and the location of
the D-channel or signaling channel. The D-channel exists on the circuit assigned in this command. Also, a
number of optional functional capabilities also need to be enabled or disabled.
For BIPU-Q channel groups, parameters 01~04 must be configured, all other parameters should remain at
default. All parameters should be configured for ISDN. Many of these are normally set to default.
Note PRI ILGs and OLGs are assigned using "Call-by-Call" on page 6-33. Therefore, ILG and OLG must
be set to 0.
1. Complete the PRI Trunks Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > ISDN > PRI.
3. Enter Channel Group number
... or click one of the following buttons:
· List choose from the list of programmed Trunks on the right side of the screen.
· Create Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
· Copy Enter an Channel Group number and click Copy to make a new Trunk assignment with
settings copied from the Channel Group entered.
· Delete Delete an Trunk
· Get Default - sets data to factory defaults.
4. Enter data.
5. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number.
Assign the proper PAD levels to channel groups in Programs 107, 108 and 114.
These levels are critical for ISDN and Strata Net IP speech levels, as well as
Quality Of Service.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = no value)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-29

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 RPTU Equipment No.
Enter the ISDN RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q equipment number as xxyyzz.
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX = cabinet 01~07
YY = slot 01~10
ZZ = T1channel 01~24.

Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for the Expansion cabinet
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for each cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
Note
zz = Channel 01 is always used to assign RPTU, BPTU or BIPU-Q
parameters
Example: If the RPTU is installed in cabinet shelf 5, slot 3, enter 050301. Enter the
equipment number xxyyzz to which the ISDN PRI Trunk is to be assigned.
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the
system. They can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU
PCBs.
02 Protocol
The Protocol to be followed defines the type of interface expected based upon the
equipment type at the distant end of the connection.
In North America, the choices are 1-Bellcore National ISDN; 4-Bellcore National
ISDN NT; or 5-Strata Net.
Use IP for BIUP-Q, Strata Net IP.
Use Strata Net for RPTU/BPTU, Strata Net PRI
Possible values: National ISDN, ETSI, TTC, National ISDN Nortel or Strata Net
(default = None)
03 Incoming Line Group
ISDN and Strata Net IP need to have Trunk Group assignments to process the
calls being received. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group,
then Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = 0)
04 Outgoing Line Group
ISDN and Strata Net IP needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process the
calls being originated. If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group,
then Call-by-Call Services must be used.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp) (default = 0)
05 Trunk ID Type
Identify whether the communication with the PSTN requires an identifier. Select
Explicit to require an identifier.
Possible values: Implicit (default) or Explicit
6-30
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
06 Trunk ID
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing when an "explicit" identified is
used to communicate with the PSTN which channel on which link is used for the
given call. This identifier is assigned by the connected PSTN.
Possible values: 0 ~ 126 (default = 0)
07 D Ch Position
PRI includes a 64-kbps D-channel (for transfer of signal information). Select the
channel position to be used for D channel signaling.
Note
This field is used only when the span interface speed is 1.5M. If the span
interface speed is 2M the value is fixed at 16.
Possible values: 0 ~ 24 (default = 24)
08~13 Bearer Services:
1. Enable the Bearer Capabilities allowed for this PRI Trunk channel group.
· Speech
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
· 3.1 KHz Audio
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
· 7 KHz Audio
Note
In North America, only Channel Number map is used (Channel Number).
· Unrestr. 64K
See Table 6-2.
·
Possible values: Channel Number (default) or Slot Number
Unrestr. 56K
· Unrestr. 2x64K
14~18 Bearer Services:
1. The Bearer Capabilities (384k Unrestricted(H0), 1536k Unrestricted(H11),
·
1920k Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video, and Unrestricted
Unrestr. 384K
Multirate) are not used and should remain disabled.
· Unrestr. 1536K
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
· Unrestr. 1920K
2. Select the Channel Method (map) to identify the channels.
· Restr. Digital
Note
In North America, only Channel Number B map is used. See Table 6-2.
· Video
Possible values: Channel Number B (default), Channel Number H, Slot Map B or
Slot Map H
19 Bearer Svc Multirate
The Bearer Capabilities 384k Unrestricted (H0), 1536k Unrestricted (H11), 1920k
Unrestricted
Unrestricted, Restricted Digital Info, Trunk Video and Unrestricted Multirate are not
used and should remain disabled. See Table 6-2.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
20 B Ch Selection Method
The method used for selecting an idle `B' channel and the reaction if the PSTN
indicates the channel is not available needs to be chosen to originate a call from
CIX.
Possible values: Explicit (default), Preferred or Any Channel
Preferred option is recommended, unless PSTN needs other choice.
21 B-Ch Selection
The search method for choosing an idle `B' channel shall also be specified.
Backward Terminal is the normal method with the PSTN following a Forward
Terminal method.
Possible values: Forward Cyclic, Backward Cyclic, Forward Terminal or
Backward Terminal (default)
22 T1 Time Slot Pattern
1544 Time Slot Pattern.
Tru
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Flexible or Floating
nks
23 E1 Time Slot Pattern
2048 Time Slot Pattern
Possible values: Fixed1 (default), Fixed2 or Flexible
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-31

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
24 T-Wait Timer
Specify whether the T-Wait timer is to be enabled or disabled. This field is only
valid for Nat'l ISDN. This should not be enabled for PRI, it is for BRI.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
25 RBT on Incoming Call
Enable Ringback Tone when terminating a call. This field is only valid for Nat'l
ISDN.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
26 Network Mode
Set this span as Master or Slave for Layer 2 of a Strata Net PRI. The opposite
value must be set for the node in which this Strata Net PRI terminates. This
governs call setup activity and is not related to clock synchronization.
Possible values: Master (default) or Slave
27 Negotiation Priority
Sets this span as Side A or Side B for Layer 3 of a Strata Net PRI. The opposite
value must be set for the node in which this Strata Net PRI terminates.
Possible values: Side A (default) or Side B
28 Layer 1 Short Break
If layer 1 is interrupted for less than 90 seconds. CIX will keep the current calls
Tolerant
open.
Possible values: Enable (default) or Disable
29 2-B channel Transfer
Enable this option to allow 2-B channel conference on PRI calls. This allows to PRI
channels to be connected in the same conference or Tandem call.
Note
This option must also be enabled by PRI provider to allow it to work.
30 Q931 Protocol Timer
Sets the Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Table 6-2
Bearer Services Table
Bearer Services
Nat'l ISDN
ETSI
TTC
Speech
X
X
X
3.1 KHz Audio
X
X
X
7 KHz Audio
X
X
unrestricted digital
64 kbps
X
X
X
information
Rate adaptation from 56
X
kbps
Circuit
2x64
X
X
Mode
384kbp (H0)
X
X
X
1536kbps (H11)
X
X
X
1920kbps (H12)
X
multirate (n x 64 kbps)
X
Restricted digital Information
X
X
Video
X
X
Packet
Shelf/Slot/Circuit
Mode
6-32
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
Call-by-Call
Program Number(s): 324 and 323
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share a PRI channel group. Traffic requirements of
different facilities vary at different times, and sharing B channels on a Call-by-Call basis makes it possible
to use fewer B channels to perform an equivalent service to the discrete counterpart.
1. Complete the "324 CBC Time Zones" on page 6-34.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > ISDN > Call by Call. The ISDN
Call by Call Service screen displays (shown right).
3. Enter Channel Group number.
4. Enter Program 323 data.
5. Enter Program 324 data.
6. Click Submit.
323 CBC Service
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-29
Call-by-Call service allows multiple facilities to share the PRI channel group. Since the traffic
requirements of each facility may vary at different times, it becomes possible to use fewer `B' channels to
perform the equivalent services of the discrete counterpart. This sharing the `B' channels on a call-by-call
basis can save the user money. To accomplish CBC services, each facility needs to be defined, its related
Line Group assigned and minimum and maximum values for the services provided. These service
parameters may be set for three different time zones, thus allowing fewer or more services of different
types at different times of the day.Complete the Call-by-Call Record Sheet.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Enter the Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Index
Enter the CBC Service Index, or click one of the following buttons:
· List view a summary list of programmed Trunks.
· Create Assign a new Trunk with default settings.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
02 Type of Service
Select the CBC Service Type.
Note
To delete CBC, set this field to 1: No Data.
Possible values: No data (default), POTS, FX, Tie Line (Enbloc), Tie Line (Cut through),
Intra LATA Out WATS, Banded Out WATTS, Inter LATA Out WATS or
INWATS
Trun
03 Facility Code
Enter the supplied Facility code value from the PSTN. If no data is entered in this field,
ks
any previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 00~31(default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-33

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
04 Service Parameter
Enter the Service parameters supplied from PSTN. If no data is entered in this field, any
previously entered data is deleted.
Possible values: Up to 5 digits (default = no value)
05 Network ID
Enter the Network ID code supplied from PSTN (this field is required if you selected
"Inter LATA Out WATS" Type of Service. If no data is entered in this field, any previously
entered data is deleted.
Possible values: 3 to 4 digits (default = no value)
06 Incoming Line
Specify the ILG for this facility.
Group
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
07 Outgoing Line
Specify the OLG for this facility.
Group
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
08 Min Calls Zone 1
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
09 Max Calls Zone 1
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 1.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
10 Min Calls Zone 2
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
11 Max Calls Zone 2
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 2.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
12 Min Calls Zone 3
Select the minimum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 0)
13 Max Calls Zone 3
Select the maximum number of Bch in Time Zone 3.
Possible values: 0~47 (default = 47)
324 CBC Time Zones
This command assigns Call-by-Call Time Zone.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
1~128 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = no value)
01 Start Zone 1
Enter the Time Zone Starting Time (hhmm).
Possible values: hh = 00~23, 99 (hour); mm = 00~59, 99 (minutes); 9999 = delete time
02 Start Zone 2
zone, (default = no value)
03 Start Zone 3
6-34
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
320 B Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-29
PRI interfaces are purchased on per interface and channel basis. The `B' channel assignments allow for a
flexible activation of channels to match the subscribed services from the Public Service Telephone
Network.This command allows you to enable or disable each B channel on selected RPTU PCBs.
1. Complete the B Channel Select Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > ISDN > B Channel. The ISDN B-
Channel Assignments screen displays.
3. Enter the Equipment Number, or click List to see a summary of progammed circuits.
4. Click the B Channel numbers that you want to activate (see Table 6-3 below for T1 and E1 B Channel
default settings).
5. Click Submit.
Table 6-3
B Channel Defaults
B Channel Position
01~15
16
17~23
24
25~31
Span Interface Speed
1.5M (T1)
ON
ON
ON
OFF (Dch Pos)
2.0M (E1)
ON
OFF (Dch Pos)
ON
ON
ON
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-35

Trunks
ISDN
316 Shared D Channel
Prerequisite Program: 302 page 6-29
The PRI Interface can be extended to include an additional PRI card to expand the total number of
channels to 47 on a Channel Group. This second PRI may optionally offer a backup D channel.
1. Complete the Shared D Channel Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration Trunk > ISDN > D Channel. The Share D
Channel Assignment screen displays.
3. Enter the Channel Group number (1~128, default = no value), or click the List button to view a
summary list of programmed Channel Groups.
4. Enter data.
5. Get Default - restores data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Channel Group
Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~48 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~128 (CIX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Equipment Number
Enter the ISDN RPTU equipment number as xxyyzz:
Enter data as XXYYZZ:
XX = cabinet 01~07
YY = slot 01~10
ZZ = T1channel 01~24.

Cabinet numbers:
CIX100: Select 01 for Base and Expansion cabinet.
CIX200: Select 01 for Base and 02 for Expansion cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01 for Base and 02~07 respectively for each Expansion cabinet.
Slot numbers:
CIX100: Select 01~04 for Base slots and 05~08 for Expansion slots.
CIX200: Select 01 ~ 04 for either cabinet.
CIX670: Select 01~08 for Base slots and 01~10 for Expansion slots.
CIX assignments are fixed as follows:
Equipment numbers are required when assigning ISDN RPTU parameters in the system.
It can also be used to display the equipment location of existing RPTU PCBs.
02 Channel ID
An identifier must be used as part of the addressing to communicate with the PSTN
which channel on which link is used the given call. This identifier is assigned by the
connected PSTN.
Possible values: 1~ 126 (default = 1)
6-36
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
03 D-Ch Provided
If a backup `D' Channel is to be used, it needs to be enabled.
Possible values: D-channel or No D-channel (default)
04 Backup D-Ch
The channel position within the 24 channels must be identified to be used for the `D'
Position
channel signaling.
Possible values: 1~24(default)
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-37

Trunks
ISDN
Calling Number
Program Number(s): 321 and 322
When calls are made using ISDN services, the telephone number for which the call originates must be
identified to the PSTN.
1. Complete the Calling Number Record Sheets.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk > ISDN > Calling Number. The ISDN
Calling Number Identification screen displays.
3. Enter the OLG Number, or click the List button to view a summary list of programmed OLGs.
4. Enter Program 321 data.
5. Enter Program 322 data.
6. Click Submit.
321 Calling Number Identification
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-5
The Calling Number ID is what is defined as the user supplied Calling Number. This number may be
optionally screened by the PSTN to ensure only calls from valid billable telephone numbers are allowed to
originate calls.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
OLG Number
Enter the OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~128 (CIX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Default Number
Enter the telephone number to use by default when originating a call. This is the
number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
02 Number Prefix
Enter the prefix telephone number for which a DID number will be appended to create a
User Identified telephone number.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This number may or may not be a billed number, but is used for Caller ID at the distant
end and could be used for returning your call.
03 Number Verification
Specify whether the number provided should be screened by the PSTN before the call is
to proceed.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default)
04 Default Number 2
Enter the second telephone number to use by default when originating a call.
Possible values: Up to 10 ASCII characters (default = no value)
This is the number that the PSTN has registered for billing purposes. The second
number is for BRI only
6-38
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
ISDN
322 Called Number Table
Prerequisite Program: 306 page 6-5
When calls are received from the PSTN, a Called Number is supplied as part of the Setup Message. This
Called Number may be used for directing the call to the appropriate service with Strata CIX.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
OLG Number
OLG Number.
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX100), 1~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~128 (CIX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
01 Source Type
Specify the type of circuit used for outgoing calls: 1- PDN; 2- GCO; 3- Pooled Line.
Possible values: Primary DN (0~99999), Group CO (1~128) or Pool Line Group
(1~128); (default = no value)
02 Source Number
Specify the number of the source type selected (PDN, GCO or Pooled Line).
Possible values: 1~32 (CIX1008), 1~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~128 (CIX670 Exp),
(default = no value)
03 Special Number
Specify the number to be sent when calling out from the source (max. seven digits). This
Assignments
number is appended to Program 321 FB02
Possible values: Up to 7 digits (default = no value)
Note
Destination Type and Destination must be entered before a DID number can be
assigned.
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-39

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
This wizard enables you to assign Direct Inward Dialing / Dialed Number Identification Service (DID/
DNIS) to ILGs quickly and easily. The wizard automatically takes you through the different programs and
parameters required.
Follow the steps below to start using the DID/DNIS Wizard.
Step 1: Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG
1. Select Trunk > Setup Wizard > DID/DNIS.
2. After reading the instructions on the screen, click Start.
Step 1: 304 Select or Create DID/DNIS ILG screen displays (shown right).
3. In the 00 DID/DNIS Incoming Line Group (ILG) field, click Create
... or from the drop-down menu, select a DID/DNIS ILG to edit.
Note Only DID/DNIS ILGs appear in the drop-down box.
See table below for screen fields and field descriptions.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 ILG Type
Select analog for RDDU or RDTU interface, or ISDN for RPTU interface.
11 DID/DNIS Digit Length
Select the number of digits (1~7) that compose each DID number for this DID/DNIS
ILG. This is the number of DID digits sent from the CO on incoming DID/DNIS. If ANI
digits are sent with DID digits, only set this parameter for the quantity of DID digits
sent.
02 Line Type
DID lines should always be set as CO type lines.
03 DID/DIT Service
DID lines should always be set as DID service
04 Std/Strata Net Service
DID lines should always be set for "Standard" service
4. If you clicked Create in Step 3, the Create New
DID/DNIS ILG screen displays.
Fill in the three fields on the screen and click Create Now. The DID/DNIS Number Range Wizard
screen displays with the new information.
5. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. This table displays
assignments for all DID/DNIS ILGs currently programmed in the CIX. For more details, see "DID/
DNIS Table View" on page 6-24.
6. After creating or selecting a DID/DNIS ILG, click Next.
6-40
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Step 2: Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2
1. From the Step 2: 309 Create or Delete DID/DNIS Numbers for ILG 2 screen (shown right), click Create
to create a block of DID/DNIS numbers. The numbers are created in consecutive order.
reate DID/DNIS Numbers screen displays (shown right).
· Specify the first number in the DID/DNIS block.
Note The quantity of digits must match the quantity of digits assigned to the selected ILG (refer back to
"DID/DNIS Digit Length" on the previous screen).
· Specify the DID/DNIS Number block size that should be created. This is the quantity of DID/DNIS
numbers ordered from the DID/DNIS provider.
· Specify "overwrite existing" or "add to existing" DID/DNIS numbers. If no DID/DNIS numbers
exist, add or overwrite is OK.
... or click Delete and the delete DID/DNIS number dialog box displays (shown right). Specify the first
and last DID/DNIS number to delete using the drop-down boxes; or, check mark Delete all DID/DNIS
numbers. Click Delete Now. The numbers are deleted.
CAUTION!
Overwrite erases all existing DID/DNIS numbers currently programmed for the
selected ILG.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
"DID/DNIS Table View" on page 6-24.
3. When finished, click Next.
Step 3: Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2
1. From the Step 3: 309 Assign DID/DNIS Number Audio Destinations for ILG 2 screen, set the DID/
DNIS Number range.
Note This step enables you to assign the ringing destinations for all DID/DNIS numbers in the selected
ILG. This assignment applies only to Voice (audio) calls--not to data calls.
2. Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which ringing assignments should be made. Use the First
Number/Last Number drop-down arrows.
3. Fill in the appropriate fields on this screen (see field descriptions below).
4. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details, see
"DID/DNIS Table View" on page 6-24.
5. After selecting DID/DNIS ringing destination assignments, click Submit to register them in the CIX
database.
6. After creating DID/DNIS ringing destinations, click Next to assign DID/DNIS Voice Mail ID codes.
These VM codes are optional and are only used if DID/DNIS numbers have unique VM boxes to "call
forward to" or "ring directly to".
Trunks
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-41

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
GCO Key Group
If a Group CO Key is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on telephones
that have this key.
Note
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in
the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do
not apply, GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
Pool Key Group
If a Pool Key Group is selected, all selected DID/DNIS numbers will ring on
telephones that have this key.
Note
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in
the Program 304, ILG assignments. Day/Day2/Night period assignments do
not apply, GCO or Pool Keys will ring in all periods.
Set for Period
DID/DNIS ringing assignments can be unique for each CIX time period: Day, Day2
and Night. Select the period(s) in which the destinations should ring. Then select the
destination type.
Destination Type
Select the type of destination:
DISA - to call in and receive DISA dial tone.
Built-in modem - to call in directly to the CIX modem with eManager.
Night Bell - to call in and close the BIOU or ACTU night bell control relay.
Dialing Digits - to call in and:
· Ring PDNs, PhDNs, and/or Pilot Numbers
· Night Ring over External Page - feature access code must be included in the
dialing digits.
· Access outgoing CO lines, Network Nodes and/or LCR to set up tandem calls -
line access codes must be included in the dialing digits.
Notes
·
When Dialing Digits is the selected Destination Type, you must set the Dialing
Digit Range below.
·
This selection will override any GCO or Pool Key Group assignment made in this
Program or Program 304, ILG assignments.
Set the Dialing Digits
Select the method in which dialing digit ringing destinations should be created:
range
Use DNIS as Destination - the destination digits for each DID/DNIS number will be the
same as the DID/DNIS number. This option is normally used when the DID/DNIS
numbers match the telephone PDNs, PhDNs etc.
Start with - enter the number to which the first selected DID/DNIS number should ring.
Ringing destinations will be assigned consecutively, starting with this number, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the dialing digits
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each dialing digit number.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each dialing digit number.
6-42
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS VMID Codes for ILG
1. From the Step 4: Assign DID/DNIS Number VMID Codes for ILG 2 screen, assign VMID codes for all
DID/DNIS numbers in the selected ILG. See field descriptions below.
2. (Optional) Click DID/DNIS Table View to view existing DID/DNIS assignments. For more details,
see "DID/DNIS Table View" on page 6-24.
3. After selecting VMID code assignments, click Submit to register them in the CIX database.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
Set for DID/DNIS Number
Specify the range of DID/DNIS numbers for which VMID code assignments should
range:
be made. Use the First Number/Last Number drop down arrows.
Set for:
The codes can be set independently for DTMF in band or SMDI Voice Mail
integration.
DTMF VMID
Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF voice mail integration.
SMDI VMID
Select to set VMID code assignments for SMDI voice mail integration.
All
Select to set VMID code assignments for DTMF and SMDI voice mail integration.
Note
DTMF and SMDI Voice Mail integration will not function simultaneously on
the CIX.
Set the VMID range
Select the method in which VMID codes should be created:
Use DNIS as VMID - the VMID code for each DID/DNIS number will be the same as
the DID/DNIS number.
Start with - enter the VMID that should be assigned to the first selected DID/DNIS
number. VMID codes will be assigned consecutively, starting with this code, to each
consecutive DID/DNIS number.
Only Use - all selected DID/DNIS numbers will be assigned to the VMID code
entered here.
Add to front - these digits will be added in front of each VMID code.
Add to End - these digits will be added to the end of each VMID code.
325 Strata Net IP Trunk Assignment
Prerequisite Program: 100cxpg_04.pdf"> page 4-1; 304 on page 6-1; 306 on page 6-5
This command assigns Strata Net IP trunks.
1. Use the record sheet to record your desired Station settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Trunk> Full Strata Net IP.
3. Setup the Channel Group by adding values to the remaining fields.
4. Click Submit.
Trun
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
ks
Channel Group
Enter a Channel Group Number.
Possible values: 1 to 48.
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
6-43

Trunks
Trunk DID/DNIS Setup Wizard
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Equipment
Assign the Equipment Number of the LIPU card.
Possible values: Shelf: 01~02; Slot: 01~04
02 LAN Interface
Select "1" for an LIPU or "2" for an LIPS.
Number
Possible values: 1 or 2
03 Strata Net IP
Enter the number of LIPU or LIPS channels to be assigned as Starta Net IP
Channels
resources
Possible values: 1 ~ 16
04 ILG
ISDN and Strata Net IP needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process
the calls being received.
If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then Call-by-Call
Services must be used.
Possible values: 0 to 50
05 OLG
ISDN and Strata Net IP needs to have Trunk Group assignments to process
the calls being originated.
If multiple trunk groups are used within the Channel Group, then Call-by-Call
Services must be used.
Possible values: 0 ~ 50
06 Bearer Svc - Speech
The Bearer Capabilities (Speech, 3.1k Audio, 7k Audio, Unrestricted 64k,
Unrestricted 56k, and 2x64k Unrestricted) allowed need to be enabled/
disabled for the channel group. Also the type of map to be used to identify the
channels. Note: In North America, only Channel Number B map is used (1-
Channel Number B).
Possible values: Enable (Default) or Disable
07 Bearer Svc - 3.1KHz
The Bearer Capabilities (Speech, 3.1k Audio, 7k Audio, Unrestricted 64k,
Audio
Unrestricted 56k, and 2x64k Unrestricted) allowed need to be enabled/
disabled for the channel group. Also the type of map to be used to identify the
channels. Note: In North America, only Channel Number B map is used (1-
Channel Number B).
Possible values: Enable (Default) or Disable
08 RBT on Incoming
Enable Ringback Tone to be returned on terminating the call.
Call
Possible values: Enable (Default) or Disable
09 Q931 Protocol
Set Q931 Protocol Timer. If Long is set, T303 is 8s and T301 is 300s.
Timer
Possible values: Normal (Default) or Long
10 T38 Protocol
Enable the T.38 Protocol for facsimile communication.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (Default)
6-44
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Attendant
7
Attendant
This chapter provides programming information for Strata CIX Attendants.
404 Attendant Group Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
This program establishes Attendant Groups, distribution methods and alternate destinations.
1. Complete the Attendant Group Record Sheet.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > Attendant > Group Assignment. The
Attendant Group Assignment screen displays (shown right).
3. Select the Attendant Group Member.
... or click one of the following buttons.
· List to view data list window.
· Copy to Attendant group numbers.
4. Enter Program 404 data.
5. Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
6. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
00 Attendant Group
Select the Attendant Group Member Number.
Member
Possible values: 1 (CIX100, CIX200, CIX670 Basic), 1~8 (CIX670 Exp.),
(default = no value)
01 Call Distribution Method
Select the Call Distribution Method for attendant console.
Possible values: Most Idle First (default), Next Available First or Broadcast
02 Alternate Destination
Enter the Alternate Attendant Destination (DN, Network DN or Group Pilot Number).
If no data is entered in this field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
03 Overflow Time
Select the Attendant Overflow Time in minutes.
Possible values: 0~180 (default = 30)
04 Group Overflow
Enter the overflow destination for this attendant group. If no data is entered in this
Destination
field, any previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 32 digits (default = no value)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
7-1

Attendant
404 Attendant Group Assignment
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
05 VMID Code SMDI
Enter the Attendant's Voice Mail ID code. If no data is entered in this field, any
previous entries are overwritten.
Possible values: Up to 10 digits (default = no value)
07 ICI1~16 ICI10
For 07 ICI1~16 ICI10, select ILG Assignments for ICI Groups.
· ILG1
· Assign the 1st ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
· ILG2
· Assign the 2nd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
· ILG3
· Assign the 3rd ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
· ILG4
· Assign the 4th ILG to ICI Groups 1~10.
Note
Each ILG can only be assigned once in any of the ICI Groups.
Possible values: 0~32 (CIX100), 0~50 (CIX200, CIX670 Basic),
0~128 (CIX670 Exp.), (default = 0)
7-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

Attendant
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
400 Emergency Call Destination Assignment
Prerequisite Program: None
Attendant
This command assigns Emergency Call destinations to Emergency Call groups. There is one group for
each Day mode (Day1, Day2 and Night).
1. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Attendant > Emergency Call. The Emergency Call screen
displays.
2. Enter Program 400 data.
... or click one of the following buttons:
· Insert assigns the destination for the selected index.
· Modify assigns a new destination to the selected index.
· Remove removes the assigned destination from the table.
· Get Default - sets all data to factory defaults.
3. Click Submit.
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
01 Day/Night Mode
Select the time of day mode (Day1,Day2,Night) from the table below.
Possible values: Day1, Day2, Night (default = no value)
02 Called Number Index
Emergency Call Group Number (1~4). The system will hunt through these in
numerical order to find an available emergency destination.
Possible values: 1~4 (default = no value)
03 Emergency Call
Enter the DN, Pilot Number or Private Number to be associated with the
Destination
Called Number Index.
Possible values: Up to 32 ASCII characters (default = no value)
04 Action
Choose whether you are replacing an existing Emergency Number Index or
inserting one in the list. If inserting, the new entry will assume the specified
index. The remaining indices will be increased by one and the last one, 4, will
be deleted.
Possible values: Modify or Insert (default = Modify)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
7-3

This page is intentionally left blank.

IP Telephone Programming
8
IP Telephone Setup
Progra
IP T
This chapter contains information on system setup for IP Telephones (IPT), IPT programming, IPT
eleph
interface card and IPT software updates.
mming
on
CIX IPT Programming
e
The following is an outline of the Basic CIX system IPT setup. This process covers the basic IP Telephone
(IPT) programming. Each network is unique and may require additional special assignments.
Card Assignments
Advanced Config > System > Card Assignment-- Assign the LIPU IP card, refer to the program
guidelines for appropriate slot assignments.
LIPU Configuration
Advanced Configuration > IP Telephony > LIPU Configuration -- Assign the LIPU IP Address,
subnet mask and gateway.
Cabinet/Slot
Select the LIPU card from the list
FB01
Enter the LIPU IP Address (default = 192.168.254.200)
FB02
Enter the LIPU Subnet Address
FB03
Enter the LIPU Default Gateway Address
BIPU Configuration
Advanced Config > IP Telephony > LIPU Configuration -- Assign the BIPU-M IP Address, subnet
mask and gateway.
Station Programming
Assing PDNs to IPTs using IP resources -- This can be completed by using the eManager PDN Range
wizard or manually created, Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignments --Program 200 (station
basic).
· IPTs assigned to BIPU-M cards are programmed in the same manner as DKTs. Any programm (FB)
used to program a DKT can be used to program an IPT.
· Continue station programming in the same manner as a DKT set, including:
· DKT Parameters
· Key Strips
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
8-1

IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Setup
IPT Data
Advanced Configuration > IP Telephony > IPT Data > IPT Data Assignment
Prime DN
Select the IPT-L from the list
Station ID (will display automatically) - This will be the
FB01
same as the PDN assigned in the Station Data program.
Station IP Address type. Contact the network
FB02
administrator for the type. ANY = DCHP, FIX = Static
Station IP Address
FB03
If FIXED enter the IP address
If ANY make no entry. (After the IPT is configured, this
will populate.)
FB04
Auto Assign Station ID - Set perference
Set StationTermintion Authentication Mode
FB05
See note below
Station MAC Address
FB06
See note below
FB07
Voice Packet Table - default = 1
Audio Codec - Set to : G.711 or G.729
FB08
Note: Soft IPT can only support G.711.
Display Software Version Number of the IPT - This will
FB09
display automatically if the IPT is connected.
Note When using Terminal Authentication Mode it is recommended that the IPT be plugged in and
configured prior to executing this program. If the IPT is not configured and present on the network
the MAC Address must be entered manually. If the IPT is configured and present on the network the
MAC Address will be entered automatically.
8-2
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Setup
CIX IP Telephone Programming Guidelines
Use the following guidelines to program your CIX IP Telephone.
Basic CIX IP Setup Using WinAdmin
1. Select Advanced Configuration> System > Card Assignments (Program 100) to set the BIPU-M PCBs
in the appropriate slots.
BIPU-M card can only be installed in 16 channel card slots:
CIX100 slots 1~8; CIX670 Base slots 1~8; and CIX670 Expansion slots 1~6
Note If the CIX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CIX assigns the BIPU-
Progra
IP T
M, code 021, to the appropriate card slots automatically.
eleph
2. Select Advanced Configuration > IP Telephony > BIPU Configuration (Program151) to set BIPU-M IP mming
address (check with the Network Administrator for IP Address, subnet mask, etc.). The BIPU version
on
number will be displayed when the BIPU is operating and is connected on the same network as
e
WinAdmin PC.
Note If the CIX is initialized (Program 900-01) after the BIPU-M is installed, the CIX assigns the BIPU-
M default parameters as showcxpg_01.pdf">n in Figure 1-6 on Page 1-5.
3. Select Advanced Configuration > Station > Assignments > Basic to assign PDNs to IP telephones
(BIPU equipment numbers) if this was not done during CIX system initialization. The WinAdmin PDN
Range wizard can also be used to assign PDNs to the BIPU channels.
Note Currently IPT PDNs are listed as DKT, they will be listed as IPT in a future version of WinAdmin.
IP telephones are programmed exactly like DKTs, so any Program command used for DKTs can be
used for IPTs.
4. Select Advanced Configuration > IP Telephony > IPT Data (Program 250). Set "05 Station Terminal
Authentication Mode" to apply if the PDN assigned to a particular IP Telephone should be linked
(reserved for) to that telephone's MAC address. Each telephone has a unique hard coded MAC address.
This prevents other IP telephones from using the reserved PDN when an IP telephone is moved.
Note If IPT Authentication is applied/not applied in Program 250-05, it will override the IPT
Authentication setting in Program 150-02.
5. If multiple CIX systems with BIPU-Ms are connected to the IP network, Select Advanced
Configuration > IP Telephony > System IP Data (Program 150), and set "09 IP CTX Identifier."
Enter a CIX Node identifier if more than one CIX Node is on the IP Network. This can be the same as
the Strata Net Network Node ID used for this system if it is in a CIX StrataNet. Network - but the two
IDs are not related in software logic.
This ID must match the Node number programmed in the IP telephone using 369Hold-2, FB06 6.
6. Run all other CIX programs necessary to customize the features required for each IP Telephone. All
programs used to program Digital Telephones also apply to IP Telephones (Program 205 keystrips, 213
Add-on-Modules, Program 204 DKT Parameters, etc.).
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
8-3

IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Setup
IP Telephone Installation and Network Connection setup
1. Install the IP telephones using instructions in the IPT chapter of the CIX and MAS Installation and
Maintenance manual.
2. From each IP Telephone, set its network connection parameters using the "369Hold" program mode
(refer to the instructions that follow).
Notes
Some IP telephones parameters must be set from each individual IPT using "369Hold" programming.
l
These parameters remain stored in the IP telephone even if the telephone is unplugged. This allows the
telephone to be moved to different locations without reprogramming.
Other IPT parameters must be set in IP Telephone > Station IP data (Program 250) in WinAdmin.
l
Initially, the parameters in WinAdmin are normally kept at defaults.
8-4
Strata CIX Programming 11/05

IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Setup
150 System IP Data
Prerequisite Program: Assign the BIPU and LIPU cards in Program 100. Create Stations using Programs 200 and
260. Set IPT Data assignments with Program 250.
This command assigns system-wide IP parameters.
1. Use the record sheet to record your desired Station settings.
2. From the Program Menu, click Advanced Configuration > IP-Telephony > System IP Data.
3. Enter values in the appropriate fields.
4. Click Submit.
Progra
IP T
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
eleph
mming
01 Automatic
Enable Automatic Assignment of Station ID when the IPT has no station ID. In
on
Assignment of Station
program 250, FB04 is the same parameter and is per terminal.
e
ID
When IPT searches to connect a CIX with no station ID, CIX looks for a PDN
which is set this parameter as "automatic", and sends the PDN to the IPT and
IPT sets it in the setting of IPT.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
02 Terminal
Enable this parameter if you want to set the PDN of an IPT.
Authentication
When "enable" is set, terminal authentication by MAC address of IPT is valid. If
another IPT which has the same PDN is connected to the network, CIX rejects
the registration of this IPT because the MAC address of IPT is different.
When "disable" is set, you can move the PDN from a IPT to another IPT and
another IPT can be connected to the CIX.
In program 250 FB05 is the same parameter for the terminal.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (default = Disable)
03 Diffserv
Enable Diffserv (Differentiated Services) priority control if voice packets on an
IP (internal) Network should be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority,
time-critical BIPU/IPT voice traffic can have preferential treatment when other
traffic is running at best effort. If Diffserv is enabled you must set the '04 TOS
Field Type' as DSCP or TOS. Note: Diffserv is usually not a standard feature
with most ISPs; contact your ISP to make arrangements to provide Diffserv or
this feature will not work correctly.
Possible values: Enable or Disable (Default)
04 TOS Field Type
If '03 Diffserv' is enabled, select DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point
Format) or TOS (Type Of Service format).
Then, if TOS is selected, set the packet priority level in '05 TOS Precedence
Type'.
Then, if DSCP is selected, set the packet priority level in '06 DSCP'.
Possible values: TOS or DSCP (Default)
05 TOS Precedence
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a packet priority level - where
Type
Critical/ESP provides the highest and Routine provides the lowest priority.
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' make selections in TOS Delay, TOS
Throughput Delay, and TOS Reliability Type.
Possible values: Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, Flash Overide, or
Critical/ESP (Default)
Strata CIX Programming 11/05
8-5

IP Telephone Programming
IP Telephone Setup
FIELD
DESCRIPTION
TOS Delay Type
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values: Normal (Default) or Low
TOS Throughput Type
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values: Normal (Default) or High
TOS Reliability Type
If TOS is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select 'Normal' for most cases
Possible values: Normal (Default) or High
06 DSCP
If DSCP is selected in '04 TOS Field Type' select a priority level from 0~ 63.
Possible values: 0 ~ 63 (Default = 0)
07 IEEE802.1p
Enable IEEE802.1p priority control if voice packets on an Ethernet LAN should
be prioritized with priority tagging. Higher priority, time-critical BIPU\IPT voice
traffic can have preferential treatment when other traffic is running at best
effort. If you enable